JP2017055923A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine comprising characteristics in display.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises display means. The display means is means capable of displaying plural kinds of display. A first kind of display out of the plural kinds of display is a decorative pattern, and the first kind of the display out of the plural kinds of display is a first display. The display means can display the first kind of the decorative pattern as a decorative pattern. In displaying the first display, the first kind of the decorative pattern is displayed on a first display position. In non-display of the first display, the first kind of the decorative pattern is displayed on a second display position. The second display position is different from the first display position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 37

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning cylinder game machine (slot machine), a sealed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming table that performs a plurality of displays has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application No. 2008-200302

  However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in display.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a display characteristic.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with display means, wherein the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one type of display among the plurality of types of display is The display is one of the plurality of types of display is a first display, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a first type of decorative design as the decoration design. Yes, the first type of decorative design is displayed at the first display position during the display of the first display, and the first display is not displayed during the display of the first display. The game machine is characterized in that a decoration symbol of a kind is displayed at a second display position, and the second display position is a display position different from the first display position.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a display characteristic.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 is shown. (B) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2 is shown. (C) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (D) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure explaining the process of a 1st sub control part, (a) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) The flowchart which shows the flow of a 1st sub control part command reception interruption process. (C) is a flowchart showing a flow of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is a flowchart showing a flow of image control processing of the first sub-control unit. It is a figure explaining the process of a 2nd sub control part, (a) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) The flowchart which shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption process. (C) is a flowchart showing a flow of second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus in one game in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus in one game in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus in one game in time series. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board of the pachinko machine concerning one embodiment of this invention from the front. (A) It shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 concerning one embodiment of the present invention. (B) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2 is shown. (C) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (D) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (E) An example of the 4th symbol display mode is shown. It is a figure which illustrates the state by which the prefetch result was memorize | stored in the prefetch result memory | storage part of the pachinko machine concerning one embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1, and (b) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 (C) exemplifies the state of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination table for special drawings in the pachinko machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol determination table of the special figure in the pachinko machine concerning one embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and (b) illustrates the special figure 2 symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display in the pachinko machine of this embodiment in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display in the pachinko machine of this embodiment in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display in the pachinko machine of this embodiment in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display in the pachinko machine of this embodiment in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display in the pachinko machine of this embodiment in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table scenario determination table and the special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table determination table in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer table in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the Echigoya tracking mode launch suggestion setting process performed in the production | presentation control process of a 1st sub control part main process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display of a hitting suggestion display in time series. (A) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the big winning opening opening process of this embodiment, (b) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the big hit round box setting process. (A) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the character introduction setting process of this embodiment, (b) It is an example of the character selection table at the time of big hit. It is another example of the character selection table at the big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the character introduction effect display in this embodiment in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of the character introduction effect display in this embodiment in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-continuous production in this embodiment in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-continuous production in this embodiment in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-continuous production in this embodiment in time series. (A) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure 2 prefetch result information command (prefetch command) reception process of this embodiment, (b) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure 2 reservation winning process. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure 2 prefetch lottery process in this embodiment. (A) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure 1 prefetch lottery process in this embodiment, (b) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the prefetch correction information setting process. (A) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure change start command reception process in this embodiment, (b) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the lottery process at the time of change start. It is an example of the prefetch correction information acquisition table in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (left figure) of the information set to the prefetch lottery information table, and an example (right figure) of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in that case. It is a figure which shows an example (left figure) of the information set to the prefetch lottery information table, and an example (right figure) of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in that case. It is a figure which shows an example (left figure) of the information set to the prefetch lottery information table in this embodiment, and an example (right figure) of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in that case. It is a figure which shows an example (left figure) of the information set to the prefetch lottery information table in this embodiment, and an example (right figure) of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in that case. It is a figure which shows an example (left figure) of the information set to the prefetch lottery information table in this embodiment, and an example (right figure) of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in that case. It is a figure which shows an example (left figure) of the information set to the prefetch lottery information table in this embodiment, and an example (right figure) of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in that case. It is a schematic diagram which shows the state of the prefetch notice in connection with the increase in holding | maintenance in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an update of the prefetch lottery information table of this embodiment accompanying the increase / decrease in holding | maintenance in this embodiment. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment from the front side (player side). 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 as viewed from the front. (A) It is the schematic front view which extracted and showed the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246. (B) It is side sectional drawing which follows the AA line in (a). The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. FIG. 6 is a front view of a center accessory unit 900. It is the figure which showed the up-and-down operation | movement of the fall expansion | deployment combination 712 in the fall expansion | deployment combination unit 700 of the state installed in the game board 200. FIG. It is the figure which extracted only the fall expansion | deployment combination object unit 700, and showed the rotation operation | movement of the fall expansion | deployment combination 712. 5A is a circuit block diagram showing main control circuits around the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. (B) It is the block diagram which showed typically the connection relation of the various board | substrates with which the pachinko machine 100 is provided. (A) It is the figure which looked at the game board 200 from the back surface, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement location of the sub control board 245a and the motor drive board | substrate 245b. (B) It is the figure which extracted a part of game board 200 and was seen from the front, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement location of the board surface periphery board | substrate 672. FIG. (A) It is the figure which permeate | transmitted some game boards 200 and was seen from the front, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement | positioning location of the accessory peripheral board | substrate 674. FIG. (B) It is the front view which extracted and showed a part of fall expansion | deployment accessory unit 700, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement place of the illumination board | substrate 676 on an accessory. It is the figure which showed an example of the electrical relationship mounted in the motor drive board | substrate 245b, and the connection relation of the motor drive board | substrate 245b and another board | substrate. It is the figure which showed an example of the electrical relationship mounted in the board | substrate surface peripheral board | substrate 672, and the connection relation of the board | substrate peripheral board | substrate 672 and another board | substrate. (A) It is the figure which showed the connection relation of the accessory peripheral board | substrate 674 and the accessory illumination board | substrate 676, and another board | substrate. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the electrical component mounted in the lighting board 676 on an accessory. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification 1 of the electrical component mounted in various boards. (B) It is the figure which showed the modification 2 of the electrical component mounted in various boards. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification 3 of the electrical component mounted in various boards. (B) It is the figure which showed the modification 4 of the electrical component mounted in various boards. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification 5 of the electrical component mounted in various boards. (B) It is the figure which showed the modification 6 of the electrical component mounted in various boards. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification 7 of the electrical component mounted in various boards. (B) It is the figure which showed the modification 8 of the electrical component mounted in various boards. It is the figure which showed the modification of the connection relation of various board | substrates. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 2000 as viewed from the front side (player side). (A) It is an external appearance perspective view of the information display button 2046. FIG. FIG. 70 (b) is a top view of the information display button 2046. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the payout control part 600 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is the figure which showed an example of the alerting | reporting aspect of the error alerting | reporting by the pachinko machine. (A) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the lamp control process of the pachinko machine 100 in this embodiment, (b) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of a luminance data setting process. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the all port lamp output process of this embodiment. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the system data output process of this embodiment. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the power LED restriction | limiting process of this embodiment. (A) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the status change process at the time of power LED idle of this embodiment, (b) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the status change process at the time of power LED lighting. (A) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of status change processing at the time of power LED OFF of this embodiment, (b) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of status change processing at the time of power LED restriction | limiting monitoring. (A) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the power LED update process of this embodiment, (b) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the update process at the time of power LED lighting. (A) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the update process at the time of power LED OFF of this embodiment, (b) It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the update process at the time of power LED restriction | limiting monitoring. It is an example of the timing chart which shows the data (lighting data) for the drive of power LED in this embodiment, and the relationship of an output. It is an example of the timing chart which shows the data (lighting data) for the drive of power LED in this embodiment, and the relationship of an output. It is an example of the timing chart which shows the data (lighting data) for the drive of power LED in this embodiment, and the relationship of an output. It is an example of the timing chart which shows the data (lighting data) for the drive of power LED in this embodiment, and the relationship of an output.

  <First Embodiment>

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  <Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is attached to the front side of the main body 104 via a hinge portion 112 so that the inside Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  Although details will be described later, an ornamental symbol display device 208 and an effect device 206 having an effect movable body 224 that imitates a human arm are arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the lower right of the game area 124, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the first special symbol hold lamp 218 are displayed. In addition, a second special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL ( Other display devices including an electroluminescence display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 includes a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. The positions and sizes of the display areas 208a to 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the general figure variable game is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  Further, in a lower area of the game area 124, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a first variable winning opening 234, A second variable winning opening 235 is provided, and a normal start opening 228 is provided in the right area of the game area 124.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided at the lower right of the game board 200. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, one is arranged below the center part of the game board 200 and one at the lower right. The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 have the same structure, and include door members 234a and 235a that can be freely opened and closed, and balls cannot be entered while the door members 234a and 235a are closed. When the special figure display device wins the special figure display game and the special symbol display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol, the door members 234a and 235a have a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds). Opening and closing at the number of times (for example, 15 times)

  In this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable game is won, the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and when the special figure 2 variable game is won. Opens and closes the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls). It is discharged as a sphere into the upper plate 126. The balls that have entered the first variable prize opening 234 and the second variable prize opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out-port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the spear 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning hole (the general winning hole 226, the first variable winning hole 234, the first 2 variable prize winning opening 235) or starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or ordinary opening The outlet 240 is reached only by passing through 228.

  <Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in an arc in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, each starting port, winning port, variable winning port A (first variable winning port 234 and / or second variable winning port 235). Receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor for detecting a passing game ball, a magnetic sensor, a front frame door open sensor 109, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower pan full sensor, and compares the result with an amplification result or a reference voltage. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the result to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the universal diagram display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, Lamp 216, special figure 1 holding lamp 218, special figure 2 holding lamp 220, high-accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) and a driving circuit 330 for controlling the display, and a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade of special figure 2 starting port 232 A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the member 232a and the door member 234a of the attacker A is connected.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 has a voltage value of the power source. When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. In addition, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is a two-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600. Also, a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 can play the pachinko machine 100 game in the information input circuit 350 provided in an external device (for example, a hall computer (not shown) or a data display) via the information output circuit 336 and the external terminal board 349. An external terminal board signal (details will be described later) indicating information and the like is output. The “external terminal board” denoted by reference numeral 349 may be referred to as an “external concentrated terminal board” in the slot machine, and is not limited to the name “external terminal board”.

  The payout controller 600 also outputs an external terminal board signal to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and detection of the shielding device sensor 430 and the chance button A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the unit 724 to the basic circuit 402, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effects data, and a liquid crystal control means (liquid crystal control unit) 700 are connected. The liquid crystal controller 700 includes, for example, a VRAM 436, a VDP 434 (video display processor), and the like. The VRAM 436 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404, and a work area of the VRAM 436. Is used to generate a display image and display the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. The first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 may be provided on different substrates, or may be controlled by one CPU 404 (provided on the same substrate). It may be configured. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and frequency. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, a drive circuit 517 for performing drive control of the chance button drive unit 708, and the current position of the effect movable body 224. A movable body sensor 424 to be detected, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table A game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the frame lamp 542, and serial communication control for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 The circuit 520 is connected.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. Also, the payout control unit 600 receives the detection result of the front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106, and outputs the received result to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on a control signal instructing the firing intensity according to the amount, control of a launch motor (not shown) that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and a ball feeding device that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launcher 110 Control (not shown) is performed.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the dispensing device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  <Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. 1, and FIG. 4B shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 5 (a), five types from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are shown as the stop pattern modes of Special Figure 1 in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 5 (b), There are four types of special symbols “stop” from “special drawing a” to “special drawing d” as special symbols 2 of special symbol 2 in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In addition, the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black part shows the location of the segment which lights up.

  Among the stop symbol patterns of Special Figure 1, “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

  Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  The stop symbol mode of the other special figure 1 will be described. "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. The “special drawing E” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol in which the profit amount given to the player is relatively small.

  Further, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 will be described. “Special figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol. , “Special Figure d” is an outlier symbol.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” and the 8R jackpot of “Special Figure c” are notified, a combination of symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “Decoration 1—Decoration”). 1-decoration 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ") are stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", the 16R special jackpot of "Special Figure a", and the 8R special jackpot of "Special Figure b", a combination of symbols in which three odd odd decorative symbols are arranged (For example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

  Further, when notifying the small hit of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and 2R jackpot called “special drawing C” suddenly changes is notified. Then, “decoration 1—decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the special symbol E or the special symbol d, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5C is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary diagrams: “general diagram A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general diagram B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (d), the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black painting part shows the location of the segment which lights up.

  <Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random number values is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  <Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the first variable winning port 234, the second variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232 It is determined that there has been a ball entry or a normal start port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235. To do. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made at the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, a ball enters the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening. Stores information indicating that this has occurred.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 5 (d)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal state is not operating is set. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. In the special figure prefetching process, when the number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure holding number storage area increases, the start information related to the increased holding is prefetched, and the special symbol related lottery symbols are drawn Pre-determination is performed before the success / failure determination in the process. The flow of the special figure prefetching process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure a shown in FIG. ~ Special figure d (In the special figure 1 state update process, the special figure A to the special figure E shown in FIG. 5A is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 is detected until a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, the maximum count number) is detected in the second variable prize opening 235 (see FIG. 1 is the first variable prize opening 234). A signal for holding the door member 235a (the door member 234a in FIG. 1) in an open state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the door member 234a of the first variable prize winning opening 234. The information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 235a (the special figure 1 is the door member 234a) is provided to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 (the special figure 1 is the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234). A signal for holding the closed state is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times, the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). In order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player of the image is displayed, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, the number of hours (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and the RAM 308 is provided at the same time as the end of the jackpot game. Turn on the short time flag. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high-probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low-probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during the jackpot game, the second number of game balls before the predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 during the jackpot game. To solve this, there is a problem that many game balls enter the special figure starting port 232 and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. It is. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230. For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234 (or Including the presence or absence of winning in the second variable winning opening 235).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit described above.

  <Special figure look-ahead processing>

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 16A to 16C).

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a special figure prefetching result storage unit that stores a special figure prefetching result (also referred to as a prior determination result) as a result of executing the special figure prefetching process is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 (see FIGS. 16A and 16C) can store up to four prefetch results of special figure 1 in this example. Also, in the RAM 308, there is provided a special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 1 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 1 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 1 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last).

  When erasing the first special figure 1 start information in the special figure 1 start information storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously erases the first special figure 1 prefetch result information in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. When the information of the first special figure 1 prefetch result is deleted, the remaining special figure 1 prefetch information is processed so that the rank of the information is advanced by one.

  The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 (see FIG. 16B) can store up to four prefetch results of special figure 2 in this example. Also, in the RAM 308, a special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of prefetch results of special figure 2 stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 2 prefetch number is provided. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 2 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 2 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last).

  When erasing the first special figure 2 start information in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously erases the first special figure 2 prefetch result information in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. When the information of the first special figure 2 prefetching result is deleted, the remaining special figure 2 prefetching information is processed so that the rank of the information is advanced by one.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 2 start information has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 start information has increased is made, for example, by referring to the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 2 start information has increased when the special figure 2 reservation number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 reservation number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. Determines that the special figure 2 starting information has not increased. If it is determined that the special figure 2 start information has increased, the process proceeds to step S303. If it is determined that the special figure 2 start information has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information is pre-read from the special figure 2 random value storage area before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, for example, the determination table for determining whether or not to be used and the special figure 2 symbol determination table (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is used. Is determined in advance (pre-reading determination) before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 1 start information has increased. The determination as to whether or not the special figure 1 start information has increased is made, for example, in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area, as in FIG. The comparison is made with the stored special figure 1 look-ahead number. If it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has not increased, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the main control unit timer interrupt process is completed. Return to.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information is pre-read from the special figure 1 random value storage area before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table (see FIG. 17 and FIG. 18) used at the time of determination, the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is used. Is determined in advance before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In this embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined (pre-read processing). However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined (for every hold) Special figure prefetching processing may be performed). Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Further, in this embodiment, pre-reading is always executed for the increased special figure 2 starting information, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased special figure 1 starting information except during the electric support. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the start information of the special map 1 and the special map 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the starting information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit, and the prefetching is performed. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the rendering using the pre-read result.

  <Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S401 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

  In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated. In addition, an effect lottery process is performed based on a command from the main control unit 300, and a liquid crystal command or a process of setting part data at a predetermined position is performed.

  The first sub-control unit 400 stores the box data in the RAM 408 at the timing of each effect execution at the start of fluctuation, at the time of increase in hold, when operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is detected, or when the symbol is stopped. Set in the data setting area. Note that the timing of setting the box data in the RAM 408 is not limited to the above, and may be set at a timing such as a notice effect, a reach effect, or a button effect. The box data is composed of a liquid crystal command and part data including information such as sound, light emission, and an accessory (movable body) that is executed in response to an effect based on the liquid crystal command. Each box data is set with a storage position (position) of each part data. The second sub-control unit 500 executes control for effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command, and transmits a return command to the first sub-control unit 400. The return command also includes position information. If there is part data in the position after receiving the return command, a part data setting process to be transmitted to the speaker 120, the various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, the effect movable body 246, 224, etc. is performed.

  In step S411, when pressing of the chance button is detected, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S409 to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button is performed. In step S413, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to VDP 434.

  In step S415, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S417, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S421, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S403.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 in the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 of the first sub control unit timer interruption process, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S419, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S413 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S709, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Wait for input. In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S801 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S803, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805.

  In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S 811, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S813, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S803.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S1001 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S1003 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  <Example of display during game>

  FIGS. 11 to 13 are diagrams showing an example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in one game in time series.

  Referring to FIGS. 11A and 11B, the decorative symbol display device 208 of the present embodiment has a special display area below the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. A special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 and a variable icon display area 800 that suggest the number of holds in FIG. 1 are provided. In the present embodiment, four hold icons that are the maximum number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game can be displayed in one special figure 1 hold icon display area (hold icon display area) 900, and the display area 900 is displayed. The area is roughly divided into four areas: a first area 900a, a second area 900b, a third area 900c, and a fourth area 900d. The first area 900a to the fourth area 900d correspond to the first to fourth hold orders of the special figure 1 variable game, respectively. That is, a hold icon corresponding to the earliest hold (stored in the past) can be displayed in the first area 900a. Similarly, in the second to fourth areas 900b to 900d, 2 to 4 hold icons can be displayed. Each hold icon corresponding to the eye hold can be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, a special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 that suggests the number of reservations of special figure 2 is provided in the display area on the right side of the right symbol display area 208c. As in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900, the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 can display four hold icons that are the maximum number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 2 holding icon display area 902 is not displayed when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0, and is displayed when the holding of the special figure 2 increases. In the following description of the present embodiment, an example of a change in the state of each component (for example, an example of a change in the display of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900) accompanying the increase or decrease of the special figure 1 hold will be described. When there is an increase / decrease in the holding of the special figure 2, it can be displayed in the same manner. For convenience of explanation, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 may be simply referred to as a hold icon display area 900 in some cases.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth graphic for special figure 1 for suggesting that the display area above the special figure 2 holding icon display area 902 is during special figure 1 variable game (during special figure 1 fluctuation). A display area 208e, a special symbol 2 4th symbol display area 208f for suggesting that the game is in the special figure 2 variable game (during the special figure 2 change), ), And a general-purpose fourth symbol display area 208g. The special symbol 1 4th symbol display area 208e turns off (or flashes) the image of ○ during the special game 1 variable game, and lights up the image of ○ when the special game 1 variable game is stopped. Similarly, the 4th symbol display area 208f for special figure 2 displays an image of △, and the 4th symbol display area 208g for general graphic displays an image of ◇, and is turned off (or blinked) during each variable game. Lights up when is stopped.

  Also, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a general figure display device 210 are provided. Above these display devices, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and a general figure holding lamp 216 are provided.

  These configurations are the same in all of the following embodiments (examples) unless otherwise specified.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 11A, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights two LEDs to notify that there are two holdings in the special figure 1. Both the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the ordinary figure holding lamp 216 are turned on, and it is informed that both the special figure 2 and the ordinary figure holdings are 0.

  The 4th symbol display area 208e for the special figure 1 (and the 4th symbol display area 208f for the special figure 2 and the 4th symbol display area 208g for the special figure) is lit up to notify that the variable game has stopped. Yes. In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 4 -decoration 1 -decoration 7”, which is a combination of disparate decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the hold icon display area 900 (the first area 900a and the second area 900b), the hold icons PI1 and PI2 of FIG. 1 are shown, respectively.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5A, a circular (sphere) hold icon PI1 is displayed in the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900. In addition, a circular hold icon PI2 is displayed in the second area 900b.

  Next, in the timing shown in FIG. 5B, one special figure hold is consumed, the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 2 to 1, and the first special figure display device 212 displays the symbol fluctuation display. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 turns off one of the two LEDs, turns on one LED, and the fourth graphic display area 208e for the special figure 1 is in the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates that the image of ○ is off (or flashing).

  In the hold icon display area 900, the timing shown in FIG. 6C is the movement animation between the hold and change icons in which the hold icon PI1 of the first area 900a corresponding to the digested hold moves to the change icon display area 800 ( Alternatively, the hold icon deletion animation) and the hold icon movement animation in which the hold icon PI2 in the second area 900b moves to the first area 900a are shown. Specifically, an animation in which the hold icons PI1 and PI2 move to the right side is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / variation icons and the movement animation of the hold icons are continuously executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state where the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are completed. That is, the fluctuation icon CI is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 800, the hold icon PI1 is displayed in the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900, and the hold icon PI2 in the second area 900b is deleted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (f) is a state in which the decorative symbol variable display shown in FIG. 1 is started in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is shown. As shown in (b) to (f) in the figure, in the present embodiment, when the hold is digested, first, the first special figure display device 212 starts the symbol variation display, and the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is displayed. After the light is turned off, the fourth symbol display area 208e for special figure 1 turns off the image of ○ (or blinks). Thereafter, the hold icon PI executes animations of movement, change, and deletion, and thereafter, the symbol variation display of the decorative symbols is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. Any of these state changes may be executed first in a sequential manner, and may be executed in any order (the order may be changed). Moreover, at least some may be performed simultaneously.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G shows a state in which the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 (in this example, the chance button is displayed) corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. Image).

  In addition, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (this In the example, blue is displayed below the first operation means image BG1. This timing is the start of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, and all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color. In addition, an image of the character (donor) is also displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds as the reception period) has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image. The TG1 displays an image in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 (execution of a decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is executed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I is in the state before the time further elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136 (for example, before the reception period of 6 seconds elapses) (FIG. ) Shows a state in which the chance button 136 has been operated. At this timing, based on the operation of the chance button 136 being performed, after deleting the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, A character display “Chance!” And a character image (dono) are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. This notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed. Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrates the case where a notice effect is displayed as an example, another effect display may be sufficient.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 6 (j) and (k) are in a state in which an effect corresponding to the result of determination of success / failure, the variation time and the winning notice effect is started, triggered by the operation of the chance button 136. In the same figure, (j) and (k) show an example of reach display in the variation display of the decorative symbols.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6L is the start state of super reach production, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white (white background), and the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, a small display (decreasing display of decorative symbols) is displayed in the lower right of the display area. Further, the hold icon display area 900, the change icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, and the change icon CI are hidden (erased). Note that the hold icon display area 900, the change icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, the change icon CI erase timing, the white back timing, and the decorative symbol reduction display timing are the first to be executed sequentially. It may be executed in any order (the order may be changed). Moreover, at least some may be performed simultaneously. In addition, the hold icon display area 900, the change icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, and the change icon CI may be displayed during the super reach production, or some of them may be hidden.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 12 (m), FIG. 12 (n), FIG. 12 (o) to FIG. 12 (q), for example, the execution of a swordsman reach production that confronts a swordsman character with a sword is started. It is in a state. Here, as an example, after displaying the swordsman character and the character “VS swordsman” (FIG. 11 (m)), the confrontation scenes of the character (dono) and the swordsman character are displayed (FIG. 11 (n) to FIG. 12 ( q)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 12 (q) displays a scene in which the character (dono) has won the swordsman character. In FIG. 12 (r), the symbol combination (probable big hit) is displayed in a reduced display of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7”) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (s) changes the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to white, and the timing shown in FIG. 4 (t) hits the symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 ( After the symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is displayed in a swinging manner, the ornamental symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 5 (v), the stop display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and the “probability big hit” character for notifying the start of the big hit is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 12 (t) ′ to FIG. 12 (v) ′ is continued from FIG. 12 (s) when the big hit reach effect (the reach effect of the decoration 6) is started in FIG. 11 (k). It is timing. This timing is displayed after the jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is shaken and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208 ((t) ′ in the figure). A decorative symbol stop display is performed ((u) 'in the same figure), the decorative symbol stop display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and a "big hit" character for notifying the start of the big hit is displayed (same as above) FIG. (V) ′).

  FIG. 13 shows an example of display when there is a shift in the swordsman reach production.

  The timing shown in FIG. 13 (a) is the timing following FIG. 12 (p), and displays a scene in which the character (dono) loses to the swordsman character. Further, in FIG. 13B, the fluctuation display of the shifted symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) is displayed in the reduced display of the ornamental symbol, and the timing shown in FIG. The entire display area of the symbol display device 208 is changed to white.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed with a swinging variation display of a combination of symbols (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) and a hold icon display. The hold icon PI1 is displayed again in the area 900, and the change icon CI is displayed again in the change icon display area 800. Moreover, in the same figure (e), the stop display of a decoration symbol is performed in the symbol display area 208a-208c, and the image of (circle) is light-displayed in the 4th symbol display area 208e for special figures.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 5 (f) and (g) indicate that, in the change icon display area 800, the change icon deletion animation executed when the special icon change game ends and the change icon CI is deleted. The executed state is shown, and the timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state in which the deletion animation of the variation icon is completed.

  In the above example, the variation icon CI is erased after the special symbol variation is stopped. However, the variation icon CI is erased at other timing (for example, after the decorative symbol is stopped displayed or during the variation of the decorative symbol). ). Further, the change icon CI may be deleted in one frame instead of the change icon deletion animation.

  Second Embodiment

  <Structure confirmation machine with frequency>

  With reference to FIG. 14 to FIG. 50, a structure-accurate change machine with number of times (pachinko machine 100), which is an embodiment of the present invention, will be described. In addition, each Example (modification) of this embodiment and each Example (modification) of other embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

  The structural accuracy changing machine with a number of times is a pachinko machine in which whether or not to enter a specific area (probability changing operation area) is assigned according to the operation of the structure (the opening and closing operation of the first attacker 802 and the second attacker not shown). 100.

  FIG. 14 is a front view showing the game board 200 of the present embodiment. The game board 200 of the present embodiment is configured such that an attacker unit 810 is provided in place of the first variable winning opening (first attacker) 234 and the second variable winning opening (second attacker) 235 of the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. It is. Other identical components are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  The game board 200 has a decorative symbol display device 208 disposed almost in the center thereof, a first special figure start port 230 and an out port 240 disposed below the game symbol board 200, and a general diagram start port on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. 228 and the second special figure starting port 232 are arranged, and the attacker unit 810 is arranged on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 (below the second special figure starting port 232).

  In this attacker unit 810, whether to enter the specific area (probability changing operation area 808) is assigned according to the operation of the structure (opening / closing operation of the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804).

  An attacker unit 810 is provided at the upper front and is provided with a door member 802a that opens and closes so as to be visible to the player (first attacker) 802, and is not visible to the player inside the lower part of the first attacker 802. And an attacker having a shutter-type door member (second attacker 804).

  When a predetermined symbol combination is displayed on the special figure display device (the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214), the attacker unit 810 opens the second attacker 804, and the game ball When the player enters the probability changing operation area 808 (also referred to as V winning area) that cannot be viewed by the player in the second attacker 804, the big hit game is started. As described above, the structure probability changing machine (also referred to as V (winning) probability changing machine) determines whether or not the game ball can enter the probability changing operation area 808 by the opening pattern of the second attacker 804.

  In other words, in the pachinko machine (V prize winning change machine) 100 of this embodiment, whether to start a big hit game that makes it easy to win in the probability changing operation area (V prize area) 808 or to start a big hit game that makes winning difficult? Is determined, and the opening pattern of the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804 is determined for each symbol. Then, the second attacker 804 is released in a predetermined round (for example, 4R) during the big hit, and further, a shutter (not shown) in the back is opened, and the game ball enters the probability changing operation area 808. Then, the operation of the probability changing function starts (shifts to the probability changing state) after the big hit game ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 15, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display in the pachinko machine 100 (structure confirmation machine with number of times) of the present embodiment. The types of special drawings and general drawings that are stopped and displayed by the apparatus 210 will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. 1, and FIG. 4B shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG.

  In FIG. 15 (a), three types from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure C” are shown as the stop pattern modes of Special Figure 1 in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 15 (b), Two types of "Special Figure a" and "Special Figure b" are shown as the stop symbol forms of Special Figure 2 in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In addition, the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black part shows the location of the segment which lights up.

  Among the stop symbol patterns of Special Figure 1, “Special Figure A” is a 12 round (12R) jackpot symbol (substantial 8R probability variable jackpot symbol), and “Special Figure B” is a 12R jackpot symbol (substantially 8R normal jackpot symbol). Yes, "Special Figure C" is an outlier design. Both “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, but “Special Figure A” is a game ball in the probability variation operation region (V region) 808 of the attacker unit 810. Is a big hit of the opening pattern of the second attacker 804 that is easy to enter (for example, 100 ms opening → 3400 ms closing → 28000 ms opening), while “Special Figure B” is a game ball in the probability variation operating region (V region) 808 Is the big hit of the opening pattern (for example, 100 ms opening) of the second attacker 804 that is difficult to enter. Here, the shutter provided in the second attacker 804 in the present embodiment operates in a certain opening pattern (for example, 50 ms opening → 2950 ms closing → 28500 ms opening) regardless of the symbol. You may make it determine the opening pattern of the shutter provided in the 2nd attacker. “Special Figure A” has a prescribed number of rounds of 12R, but 9R to 12R has an opening time of 1R to 8R (for example, 1 to 3R, 5 to 5R) for the special winning opening (second attacker 804). Since the 8R opening pattern is significantly shorter (for example, 100 ms) than the 29000 ms opening), it can be said that the 8R opening pattern does not substantially open, so it is also referred to as a “substantially 8R probability variation big hit symbol”. Similarly, in “Special Figure B”, the prescribed number of rounds is 12R, but 9R to 12R are 1R to 3R, 5 to 8R (for example, 1 to 3R, 5 to 8R, etc.) Since the opening pattern is significantly shorter (for example, 100 ms) compared to 29000 ms opening), it can be said that the opening pattern does not substantially open, so it is also referred to as “substantially 8R normal big hit symbol”. In this embodiment, the opening patterns of 9 to 12R of special figure A and special figure B are made the same, but the opening pattern of special figure B is substantially the same as the opening pattern for normal 12R (for example, 9R to 12R is 1). -3R, the same opening pattern as 5-8R, etc. The opening pattern that allows the game ball to easily enter into the attacker (may be an opening pattern different from 1-3R, 5-8R), or conversely The opening pattern of the special figure A may be a substantially 12R probability changing opening pattern.

  Further, the stop symbol mode of special figure 2 will be described. “Special figure a” is a 16R special big hit symbol (substantially 16R probability variable big hit symbol), and “special figure b” is a missed symbol. “Special figure a” is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and is a big hit of a shutter opening pattern in which a game ball easily enters the probability variation operation region (V region) 808. Further, in the case of “special chart a”, after the big hit game is finished, the state shifts to the electric support (probability change) state, and is also referred to as “substantial 16R probability change big hit symbol”.

  All of “Special Figure A”, “Special Figure B”, and “Special Figure a” transition to the electric support state after the end of the big hit game, regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the probability variation operation area 808. To do.

  FIG. 15 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative symbols of the present embodiment are displayed differently depending on the game state (normal state (non-electric support state) or electric support (probability change / short time) state). As shown in FIGS. 1C and 1C, there are ten types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” in the normal state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 2C and 2C, in the electric support state, there are seven types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 7” which are different from the normal state.

  Then, as shown in (c) and (3) of the same figure, in the stop symbol mode of special figure 1, when the special 8R probability big hit of "Special figure A" or the real 8R normal big hit of "Special figure B" is notified. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a combination of symbols (for example, “decoration 1−”) in which the same ornament symbols of (c) and (1) in FIG. “Decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, etc.) Further, when notifying the substantial 8R probability variation jackpot of “special drawing A”, for example, the symbol combination (“decoration 7-decoration 7” in which three “decoration 7” of the ornamental symbols of FIG. -Decoration 7 ") is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2, when the substantial 16R probability variation big hit of the special figure “a” is notified in the electric support state, the “decoration 7” of the decorative symbol of FIG. A series of symbol combinations (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the normal state, when the substantial 16R probability variation jackpot of “special drawing a” is notified, a combination of symbols (“decoration 7− Decoration 7-Decoration 7 ") is stopped and displayed.

  In the case where the jackpot of “special drawing A” or “special drawing B” is notified in the electric support state, the same symbols other than “decoration 7”, for example, are the decorative symbols of FIG. A combination of symbols in which three decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Also, in this case, the same decorative design is used except for a combination of symbols in which three “decorations 7” of the decorative symbols in FIGS. 2C and 2C are arranged (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”). You may stop-display three symbol combinations that are not lined up (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5”).

  On the other hand, when notifying the special symbol C or the special symbol b, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, during the electric support, the jackpot of “special drawing A” or “special drawing B” is notified by a combination of symbols (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5”) where three identical ornamental symbols do not line up. In this case, in the case of a deviation from “Special Figure C” or “Special Figure b”, the symbol combination of the big numbers that notify “Special Figure A” or “Special Figure B” is not displayed, but may be displayed. Good. In addition, when notifying the “special drawing C” or “special drawing b” in the electric support, only a specific symbol combination (for example, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6”) may be displayed. Any one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations may be displayed.

  FIG. 15 (d) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary diagrams: “general diagram A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general diagram B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (d), the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black painting part shows the location of the segment which lights up.

  FIG. 15 (e) shows an example of the fourth symbol notification. In the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display means for special figure 1 for indicating that the special figure 1 variable game (during special figure 1 fluctuation) is in progress, and the special figure 2 variable game (figure of special figure 2). 4) The 4th symbol display means for special figure 1 for indicating that it is middle) is provided. The 4th symbol display means for special figure 1 and the 4th symbol display means for special figure 1 are LEDs, respectively, and the indication is performed by turning on and off the LEDs. In this example, the 4th symbol for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol for special figure 2 have the same notification mode, and the LED is repeatedly turned on and off during the variable game. In case of detachment, it goes out.

  FIG. 16 shows a state in which prefetching result information and the like are stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 by executing the special figure prefetching processing shown in FIG. Is illustrated. FIG. 16A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 16 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure 1 variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 16A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing C” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special drawing C” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (substantially 8R probability variation big hit) is stored as the stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure" as the stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4" “C” (out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 16B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 16B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 16B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing b” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 16B, a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 16 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 16C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the above description, an example is given in which only stop symbols are pre-determined and only stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. And may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  Next, the success / failure determination table and the special symbol determination table used in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. The tables shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. FIGS. 17A to 17B are used in the success / failure determination process of FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. An example of the success / failure determination table is shown. FIG. 17A shows a high probability table for determination of success / failure used in the special figure high probability state, and FIG. 17B shows a low probability table for determination of success / failure used in the special figure low probability state.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B includes “special figure probability” in the first column from the left, “result determination result” in the second column, and “random number range” in the third column. It consists of items. The “high probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 17A indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state. In the second column, the “result of judgment” is divided into “big hit” and “out of line”. “Random number range” in the third column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure winning random number value. Numerical values 10001 to 11638 are assigned to “high probability” and “big hit”. Numerical values 0 to 10000 and numerical values 11639 to 65535 are assigned to “high probability” and “out of”.

  The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 17B indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure low probability state. In the second column, the “result of judgment” is divided into “big hit” and “out of line”. “Random number range” in the third column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure winning random number value. Numerical values 10001 to 10162 are assigned to “low probability” and “big hit”. Numerical values 0 to 10000 and numerical values 10163 to 65535 are assigned to “low probability” and “outlier”.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 acquires the special figure winning that is obtained in order to determine whether the result of the floating game of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is a win (big hit) or a bad win (loss). The success / failure determination is performed on the random number value using the determination table. For example, if the gaming state at the time of winning / failing determination is a special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads the high / failure determination probability table shown in FIG. 17A from the ROM 306, and the gaming state at the time of winning / failing determination is special. In the case of the low-probability state, the validity determination low-probability table shown in FIG. 17B is read from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  FIG. 18 shows a special symbol determination table used to determine a symbol to be stopped and displayed after the symbol variation is completed. FIG. 18A shows a special figure 1 symbol determination table. FIG. 18B shows a special figure 2 symbol determination table. In FIG. 18 (a), the special figure 1 symbol determination table is composed of items of "result / no-go determination result", "stop symbol", and "random number range" from the left column. The “win / fail judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit” and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where “big hit” is determined as a result of the hit determination using the hit determination table shown in FIG. 17A or FIG. 17B. The case where it is determined as “out of” as a result of the determination using the determination table shown in FIG. 17B is shown.

  The item “stop symbol” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 18A represents a stop symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Two stop symbol patterns of “special drawing A” and “special drawing B” correspond to the “hit” determination result. Further, the stop symbol form of “special drawing C” corresponds to “displacement”.

  The item “random number range” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 18A indicates a numerical range (0 to 99) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure 1 random value. Regarding the determination result of “hit”, numerical values 0 to 59 are assigned to the stop symbol “special drawing A”, and numerical values 60 to 99 are assigned to “special drawing B”. A numerical value 0 to 99 of the entire range of random numbers is assigned to the stop symbol “special drawing C” with the determination result of “no match”.

  In this way, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays “Special Figure A” or “Special Figure” on the Special Figure 1 display device 212 when the success / failure determination result based on the ball entering the Special Figure 1 starting port 230 is a big hit. Which stop symbol form of “B” is to be stopped and displayed is determined with reference to the special figure 1 symbol determination table with respect to the acquired special figure 1 random value. In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays the stop symbol form of “Special Figure C” on the Special Figure 1 display device 212 when the determination result based on winning in the Special Figure 1 starting port 230 is out of place. Decide what to do.

  In FIG. 18 (b), the special figure 2 symbol determination table is composed of items of "result / no-result determination", "stop symbol", and "random number range" from the left column. In the left column, “results of success / failure determination” is divided into “big hit” and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where “big hit” is determined as a result of the hit determination using the hit determination table shown in FIG. 17A or FIG. 17B. ) Or the result of the determination using the determination table shown in FIG.

  The item “stop symbol” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 18B represents a stop symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. The special symbol “a” stop symbol form corresponds to the “hit” determination result. Further, the stop symbol form of “special drawing b” corresponds to “displacement”.

  The item “random number range” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 18B indicates the numerical value range (0 to 99) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 random value. Regarding the result of the determination as to whether or not the game is successful, a numerical value 0 to 99 is assigned to the stop symbol “special drawing a”. A numerical value 0 to 99 in the entire range of random numbers is also assigned to the stop symbol “special drawing b” having a determination result of “no match”.

  In this way, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 2 display device 214 to display a stop symbol form of “special figure a” when the success / failure determination result based on the entrance to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a big hit. To stop display. Further, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays the stop symbol form of “special figure b” on the special figure 2 display device 214 when the determination result based on winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 is out of place. Decide what to do.

  For example, in the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 from the first (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 17 is obtained based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. It is used to determine whether to make a big hit or not. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18B stored in the ROM 306 to determine a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special figure 2. Using the special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table (see FIG. 25 and FIG. 26) and the timer table (see FIG. 27) stored in the ROM 306, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game is determined.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  Further, after the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game and special figure 1 variable game, and the start opening prize is started in the order in which the special figure variable games related to the holding of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held at the start opening. It may be a forward variation. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  <Example of effect display>

  FIGS. 19-23 is a figure which shows an example of an effect display in the time series in the pachinko machine (structure probability change machine with frequency | count) 100 of this embodiment.

  The timing shown in FIG. 19 (1) is selected as “Special Figure A” (substantial 8R probability variable big hit symbol) in the first rotation (first time) of the variable game of Special Figure 1 in the normal state (non-electric support state). This is a state in which the big hit effect is started.

  At this timing, the big hit start effect is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, as an example, the display of the characters “battle bonus” indicates that the effect is being executed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the special symbol 1 4th symbol display means (LED 812 for special figure 1) for indicating that it is during special figure 1 variable game (during special figure 1 fluctuation), special figure 2 4th symbol display means for special figure 2 (LED 814 for special figure 2) for suggesting that the game is changing (during the fluctuation of special figure 2). The special figure 1 LED 812 is repeatedly turned on and off during the special figure 1 variable game, and is turned on when the special figure 1 variable game is stopped and the big win is won, and is turned off when the game is off. Similarly, the special figure 2 LED 814 is repeatedly turned on and off during the special figure 2 variable game, is turned on when the special figure 2 variable game is stopped and the big win is won, and is turned off when the game is off (FIG. 15). (See (e)). At this timing, the special figure 1 LED 812 is turned on, and the special figure 1 variable game is stopped and a big win is informed. The special figure 2 LED 814 is turned off.

  Also, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a general figure display device 210 are provided. Above these display devices, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and a general figure holding lamp 216 are provided. At this timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops displaying “Special figure A”.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 2 (2), an image imitating the game board 200 is displayed on the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hitting suggestion display is performed in the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes. The hitting suggestion display is a display for notifying the player that the period to be right-handed or the period to be left-handed has started. Here, a right-handed suggestion display (for example, the display of a character “right-handed!” In a first-handed way suggestion display area 710 provided near the center of the display area, and an arrow indicating a right-handed strike on the game board 200 is displayed. Display) to notify that the period to be right-handed has started. The hitting suggestion display may be an effect display included in the jackpot start effect, but may be an effect different from the jackpot start effect. Further, a lighting suggestion effect (for example, lighting of the lamp in the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200) by other effect means such as a lamp (LED) provided on the game board 200 or the frame (front frame door 106), a speaker 120, etc. Alternatively, a sound “right-handed!” (Right-handed notification sound) may be output from the speaker 120 when the hit suggestion display is being performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 3 (3) shows a state where the 1R-th jackpot game has started. Here, the right strike suggestion display (first right strike suggestion display) in the first strike suggestion display area 710 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased (not displayed), and a battle effect is executed in the display area. . In this example, the characters “battle effect” are displayed in the display area, indicating that the effect is being executed. Further, the number of acquired balls (here, “0pt”) is displayed at the upper right of the display area, and a small right-handed suggestion display (here, “right-handed” is displayed in the second-hit method suggestion display area 712 at the upper left of the display area. ”And a right-pointing arrow) to inform that it is in the period to be right-handed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4 (4) shows a state in which the third hit of the big hit game has started. At this timing, as an example, an effect that suggests that the winning of “Special Figure A” makes it easier for the game ball to enter the probability change operation area 808 (after transitioning to the probability change state after the end of the big hit game). (V prize suggestion production) has started. Here, the display of the characters “battle victory effect” indicates that the effect is being executed. The acquired number of balls is displayed as a cumulative value (in this example, “252 pt”), and the right hit suggestion display (second right hit suggestion display) is continued in the second hit suggestion display area 712.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (5) shows a state where the 4R-th jackpot game has started. At this timing, the V prize suggestion effect (here, the letters “Aim at the V attacker!” And the downward-pointing arrow indicating the position of the attacker unit 810) is being performed). In addition, the right-hand suggestion display is continued in the second hitting suggestion display area 712. It should be noted that a V winning suggestion effect (for example, blinking of the lamp around the attacker, or “V” from the speaker 120 by “V” by other effect means such as a lamp (LED) provided on the game board 200 or the frame (front frame door 106) and the speaker 120. A voice (such as outputting a right-handed notification sound) may be performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (6) shows a state in which the game ball has entered the probability variation operation region 808 (the state in which a V prize is won) in the 4R of the big hit game. At this timing, an effect of notifying that a V prize has been won (in this case, the display of the letter “V”) is performed, which suggests that a promiscuous state is reached after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the right-hand suggestion display is continued in the second hitting suggestion display area 712.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (7) shows a state where the 6R-th jackpot game has started. At this timing, the round effect after the V prize (the effect until the remaining number of rounds (the prescribed 12R, substantially 8R) ends) is executed. Here, as an example, the display of the characters “Round effect after battle victory” indicates that the effect is being executed. In addition, the right-hand suggestion display is continued in the second hitting suggestion display area 712.

  The timing shown in FIG. 8 (8) shows a state where the 8R-th jackpot game has ended. At this timing, the round effect after the V prize is continuously executed. In addition, the right-hand suggestion display is continued in the second hitting suggestion display area 712.

  FIG. 9 (9) shows the effects executed in the 9th to 12th R of the jackpot game. During this period, the round effect after the V prize is continued. In addition, the right-hand suggestion display is continued in the second hitting suggestion display area 712. “Special figure A” is a big hit symbol of 12R for the specified number of rounds, but 9R to 12R are set with a remarkably short opening time of the attacker unit 810, and the big hit game ends at the actual 8R. No increase after 8R. In the second strike suggestion display area 712, the right strike suggestion display is continued.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (10) executes the effect of notifying the end of the jackpot game (in this example, the display of the characters “Yoshimune RUSH rush!”). In the second hit suggestion display area 712, the right The suggestion display is continued.

  In FIG. 19, during the 5R period (between FIGS. 19 (6) and (7)), the same effect for notifying that the V prize has been won is also executed.

  Also, if the V prize is not won at the 4th R in FIG. 6 (6), the effect (for example, notifying that the V prize is not given at the 5R (between FIG. 19 (6) and FIG. 7)) (for example, Or displaying the entire display area in gray).

  In addition, when “Special Figure B” (actual 8R normal jackpot) is won, a battle failure effect is executed at the timing shown in FIG. 4 (4), and a V prize suggestion effect is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 5 (5). Is not executed. In that case, the normal round effect (the effect until the end of the remaining number of rounds (regulated 12R, substantially 8R) is completed with an effect different from the round effect after the battle win) after (5) in FIG. You may make it perform.

  FIG. 20 (11) is an example of an effect display following FIG. 19 (10), and FIGS. 20 (11) to 23 (53) show an example of an effect display in the electric support state (probability change state / short time state). .

  As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the presentation control of the first sub-control unit 400 changes based on the special figure variation pattern lottery table during the electric support state. Here, a series of a plurality of modes (Echigoya search mode, Echigoya tracking mode, and training mode) are used as background effects when a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times, 150 times, etc.) during the electric support state. An example in which the effect display is executed will be described.

  The timing shown in FIG. 20 (11) is the symbol of the big hit (substantially 8R probability variation big hit) by the decorative symbols (FIG. 15 (c) (2)) in the electric support state in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The combination (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is stopped and displayed. In the second hitting suggestion display area 712, the right hitting suggestion display is continued, and the number of jackpots (in this case, “BONUS × 1”) is displayed below the right hit suggestion display.

  Further, at this timing, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 lights up four LEDs to notify that the variable game hold of the special figure 1 is “4”.

  On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 lights 0 LEDs (all extinguishes), and notifies that the floating game hold of the special figure 2 is “0”.

  The timing shown in FIG. 12 (12) shifts to the state in which the variable game of FIG. 1 corresponding to the digested hold is started, that is, the electric support state (probability change state). This shows a state in which the first rotation of the variable game (the first variable game) has started. At this timing, the first special figure display device 212 starts the symbol fluctuation display, and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 turns off one LED and turns on three LEDs, and holds the variable game of special figure 1 on hold. Is reduced to “3”. Further, the fourth symbol display means for special figure 1 (LED for special figure 1) 812 repeats lighting and extinguishing, although not shown, to notify that the special figure 1 variable game is in progress.

  On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 lights 0 LEDs (all extinguishes), and notifies that the floating game hold of the special figure 2 is “0”.

  Also, at this timing, in the first hitting suggestion display area 710 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the right strike suggestion display (first right strike suggestion display, in this example, the characters “please hit right”) Display). This right-handed suggestion display is displayed superimposed on the front of the background display or the decorative symbol stop display. Further, the right-hand suggestion display (second right-hand suggestion display) is also continued in the second hitting suggestion display area 712.

  The timing shown in FIG. 13 (13) is a state in which the decorative display of the special symbol 1 is started in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is shown. At this timing, the right-handed suggestion display is continuously performed in the first hitting suggestion display area 710 of the decorative symbol display device 208. This right-handed suggestion display is also displayed in front of the background display and the decorative pattern variation display. Further, the right-hand suggestion display is continued in the second hitting suggestion display area 712.

  The timing shown in FIG. 14 (14) is a state after a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. 13 (13), and continues to the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area. In 208c, the decorative symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is continued. At this timing, the right-hand suggestion display in the first hitting suggestion display area 710 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted (not displayed). Further, the right hit suggestion display is continued in the second hit suggestion display area 712.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (15), the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 1 is continued in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. At this timing, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 lights up four LEDs to notify that the variable game hold of the special figure 2 has increased to “4”. Also, four special icon 2 hold icons PI2_1 to PI2_4 are displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 provided below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variable game hold of the special figure 2 is “ 4 ”is informed. Further, the right hit suggestion display is continued in the second hit suggestion display area 712. Note that the right-handed suggestion display in the second hitting suggestion display area 712 continues thereafter until the timing of FIG. 23 (53) (final fluctuation of electric support).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 16 (16), the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed in the electric support-supported decorative symbols (FIG. 15 (c) (2)) (for example, “decoration 3”). -Decoration 1-Decoration 4 ") is stopped.

  The timing shown in FIG. 17 (17) shows the state where the variable game at the 84th rotation has been completed since the start of the electric support state, and the timing shown in FIG. A state in which a variable game of rotation has started (a state in which symbol variation display is started by the first special figure display device 212) is shown.

  The timing shown in FIG. 19 (19) shows a state in which the variable game at the 85th rotation is being executed since the start of the electric support state. At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (19), in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display different from the background display from FIG. 20 (11) to FIG. Has started. In this example, a spider image and a character “bad villain” are displayed so as to hide the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed small in the lower right of the display area.

  The timing shown in FIG. 20 (20) is a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is continuously executed at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display (in this example, in this example) , Display of an image in which the character “Evil Agent” and the character “Echigoya” are discussed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 21 (21) is a state in which the decorative symbol display is continuously executed at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Echigoya is displayed. The text “Please secure!” Is displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (22), the text “Echigoya is secured!” Is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol change display indicates the decorative symbol in the electric support state (FIG. 15 ( c) A state in which a combination of symbols (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 2—decoration 5”) in accordance with (2)) is stopped and displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a variable game is executed a plurality of times (here, 85 times) during a series of effect displays (FIG. 20 (12) to FIG. 20 (22)) in the electric support state (probability variation state). A series of effect displays are executed based on a plurality of variation pattern lottery tables, although details will be described later, from the first rotation to the 84th rotation (FIGS. 20 (11) to (18)). The effect display is executed based on the pattern lottery table 1, and after the 85th rotation ((19) to (22) in the figure), the effect display is executed based on the variation pattern lottery table 2. (17) in the figure. The “84th rotation end” means “the 84th rotation variable game has ended”, and the “85th rotation start” shown in FIG. Means “started”, and “ 2 (85 rotation), "and is meant to be" 85 In variations game of rotation subsequent to perform the effect display based on the variation pattern lottery table 2 "(denoted in the following embodiments is the same).

  FIG. 21 shows the timing following FIG. 21 (23) to FIG. 25 (25) execute an effect display based on the variation pattern lottery table 3 in the variation game at the 86th rotation after the start of the electric support state (“ An example of the variable putty 3 (86 to 89) ") is shown. During these periods, the character “Yoshimune” tracks the character “Echigoya” (for example, in the corridor of the evil villa, from the right to the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character “Yoshimune” Is performing an effect of tracking the character “Echigoya”. In addition, the decorative pattern variation display is displayed small in the lower right of the display area. In addition, when the fluctuation | variation of the 87th rotation to the 89th rotation is a loss, the same effect as FIG.21 (23)-the same figure (25) is performed (the design of the stop display of a decoration symbol may differ). In the 86th to 89th rotations, if any of the fluctuations is a big hit, after the effects shown in FIGS. 33 (b) to (c) described later are performed, the big hit effects after FIG. 33 (d) are performed. Is called. The same applies to the jackpot effect in the Echigoya tracking mode (FIGS. 20 (18) to (22), FIGS. 21 (23) to (34), and FIGS. 22 (35) to (46)) in this embodiment.

  21 (26) to FIG. 28 (28), the effect display based on the variation pattern lottery table 4 is executed in the variation game of the 90th rotation after the start of the electric support state (“26” in FIG. 21 (26)). An example of the variable putty 4 (90 rotations) ”).

  The timing shown in FIG. 26 is the effect that the character “Yoshimune” continues to track the character “Echigoya” (for example, in the corridor of the bad dynasty residence, from the right to the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, The character “Yoshimune” performs the effect of tracking the character “Echigoya”), and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed small in the lower right of the display area. In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 27 (27) is, for example, the effect that the character “Yoshimune” in the back tracks the character “Echigoya” in the front is executed, and the decoration pattern is displayed in the lower right of the display area. Display small. Also, the timing shown in FIG. 28 (28) corresponds to the symbol combination (eg, “decoration 7-decoration 2—decoration”) in the lower right corner of the display area due to the electric support state decoration symbol (FIG. 15 (c) (2)). 5 ") is displayed with a small stop.

  21 (29) to FIG. 30 (30), the effect display based on the variation pattern lottery table 2 is executed in the variation game at the 91st rotation after the electric support state is started (“29” in FIG. 21 (29)). An example of the variable putty 2 (91 rotations) ”).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 29, the character “Echigoya” performs an effect of escaping from the left to the right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol is displayed in the lower right of the display area. Display small. In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 30 (30) continuously executes the effect that the character “Echigoya” escapes, and the lower right side of the display area is not affected by the decoration pattern in the electric support state (FIGS. 15C and 2). The symbol combination (for example, “decoration 4 -decoration 3 -decoration 1”) is stopped and displayed small.

  21 (31) to 33 (33) execute the effect display based on the variation pattern lottery table 3 in the variation game at the 92nd rotation after the start of the electric support state (FIG. 21 (31)). "Modified Putty 3 (92 to 95)") is an example.

  The timings shown in FIG. 31 (31) to FIG. 33 (33) execute an effect in which the character “Yoshimune” follows the character “Echigoya” escaping from the left to the right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (31), the decorative symbol variation display is displayed small in the lower right of the display area. In FIG. 32 (32), the decorative design in the electric support state (FIG. 15 (c) (2)) is used. The off symbol combination (for example, “decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. In addition, when the fluctuation | variation of 93rd rotation-95th rotation is a loss, the same effect as the same figure (31)-the same figure (33) is performed (the design of the stop display of a decoration symbol may differ).

  21 (34) to 22 (35), the effect display based on the variation pattern lottery table 4 is executed in the variation game at the 96th rotation since the start of the electric support state (see “ An example of the variable putty 4 (96 rotations) ”).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 21 (34), the same effect as in FIG. 33 (33) is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed small in the lower right of the display area.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (35), the front character “Echigoya” performs an effect of looking back on the rear character “Yoshimune”, and the symbol that is out of place due to the decorative design in the electric support state (FIGS. 15 (c) (2)). The combination (for example, “decoration 7—decoration 2—decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

  22 (36) to 37 (37), the effect display based on the variation pattern lottery table 5 is executed in the variation game at the 97th rotation after the start of the electric support state (see “ An example of the variable putty 5 (97 rotations) ”).

  During this period, the character “Echigoya” performs an effect of escaping from the right to the left of the display area of the decorative design display device 208. In FIG. In FIG. 37, the symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 1”) is displayed in a stopped state due to the ornamental symbols in the electric support state (FIGS. 15C and 2).

  22 (38) to FIG. 42 (42), the effect display based on the variation pattern lottery table 6 is executed in the variation game at the 98th rotation after the electric support state is started (“36” in FIG. 22 (36)). An example is shown in FIG.

  During this period, the character “Yoshimune” performs the effect of following the character “Echigoya” running away from the back, and in the same figure (38), the decorative symbol variation display is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the same figure (39), the symbol combination (eg, “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 7”) out of the electric support state decoration symbols (FIG. 15 (c) (2)) is stopped and displayed. In the same figure (40) to (41), the decorative symbols are variably displayed again, and in the same figure (42), a combination of symbols (eg, “decorative”) according to the decorative symbols in the electric support state (FIGS. 15 (c) (2)). 7-decoration 2-decoration 5 ") is stopped. When the change at the 99th rotation is lost, the same effects as those in (31) to (33) in the figure are performed (the decorative symbols may be displayed differently).

  22 (43) to 46 (46), an effect display based on the variation pattern lottery table 7 is executed in the variation game at the 100th rotation after the electric support state is started (“ An example of a variable putty 7 (100) ").

  At the timing shown in FIG. 43 (43), the character “Yoshimune” continues to follow the character “Echigoya” escaping forward from behind, and the decorative symbol display is displayed in the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed smaller.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 44 (44), the characters “Yoshimune” and the character “Echigoya” are erased and the characters “Escape ...” are displayed. In FIG. 45 (45), the characters “Enter the training mode” are displayed. it's shown. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (46), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the 100th rotation of the decorative symbol (FIGS. 15 (c) (2)) after the start of the electric support state is lost. Are stopped and displayed (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 1—decoration 4”). In addition, the remaining number of time reductions (in this example, “50 remaining”) is displayed at the upper right of the display area, and the big hit number (in this example, “BONUS × 1”) and the number of acquired balls are displayed at the lower right of the display area. (In this example, “990 pt”) is displayed. Also, the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 and the variable icon display area 800 that have not been displayed from FIG. 20 (19) to FIG. 22 (45), and the corresponding special figure 2 hold if there is a hold. The icon is displayed. In this example, the second special symbol hold lamp 220 lights up four LEDs to indicate that there are four holds, and the four hold icons PI2_1 for special figure 2 corresponding to the four holds are displayed. PI2_4 is displayed.

  22 (47) to FIG. 23 (48), the effect display based on the variation pattern lottery table 8 is executed in the variation game of the 101st rotation to the 149th rotation after the electric support state is started (FIG. 22 ( 46) “Modified putty 8 (101 to 149)”).

  Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (47), one special figure 2 hold is consumed, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 lights up three LEDs to indicate that the remaining hold is "3". At the same time, in the special figure 2 display device 214, a variable display corresponding to the digested suspension is executed. In addition, in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is executed. In addition, with the suspension of the hold, the hold icon PI2_1 changes to the change icon CI and is displayed in the change icon display area 800, and the special icon 2 hold icon display area 902 displays the hold icons PI2_2 to PI2_4 of FIG. Three hold icons PI2_1 to PI2_3 that have been moved from are displayed.

  In addition, the remaining number of time savings (in this example, “49 remaining”) is displayed at the upper right of the display area, and the big hit number (in this example, “BONUS × 1”) and the number of acquired balls are displayed at the lower right of the display area. (In this example, “990 pt”) is continuously displayed.

  During the period shown in FIG. 23 (49) to FIG. 53 (53), the effect display based on the variation pattern lottery table 9 is executed in the variation game at the 150th rotation after the start of the electric support state (FIG. 23 (49)). ) “Modified Putty 9 (150)”).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 49 (49), one special figure 2 hold is consumed, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 lights up three LEDs to indicate that the remaining hold is “3”. In the display device 214 in FIG. 2, a variable display corresponding to the digested suspension is executed. In addition, in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is executed. In addition, as the hold is digested, the hold icon PI2_1 is changed to the change icon CI and displayed in the change icon display area 800. The special icon 2 hold icon display area 902 includes the hold icons PI2_2 to PI2_4 in FIG. Three hold icons PI2_1 to PI2_3 that have been moved from are displayed. In addition, the remaining number of time reductions (in this example, “LAST” indicating the final change) is displayed at the upper right of the display area, and the big hit number (in this example, “BONUS × 1” is displayed at the lower right of the display area). )) And the number of acquired balls (in this example, “990 pt”) are continuously displayed.

  At the timing of FIG. 50 (50), in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 5- The decoration 6-decoration 3 ") is displayed in a swinging manner.

  At this timing, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 lights four LEDs to indicate that the remaining hold is "4", and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 has four hold icons PI2_1 to PI2_4. Is displayed, and the variation icon CI is continuously displayed in the variation icon display area 800. In addition, the remaining number of time reductions (in this example, “LAST” indicating the final change) is displayed at the upper right of the display area, and the big hit number (in this example, “BONUS × 1” is displayed at the lower right of the display area). ”) And the number of acquired balls (in this example,“ 990 pt GET ”characters) are displayed.

  At the timing of FIG. 51 (51), the number of consecutive hits in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, “BONUS × 1”) and the number of acquired balls (in this example, “990 pt GET”). ")", And a small decorative pattern is displayed in the lower left of the display area.

  At the timing of FIG. 52 (52), in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination (for example, “decoration 4- The decoration 1-decoration 7)) is displayed in a shaking manner.

  At this timing, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 lights up four LEDs, suggesting that the remaining hold is "4", and displays the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 below the display area. Four hold icons PI1_1 to PI1_4 for the special figure 1 are displayed. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 lights up four LEDs to indicate that the remaining hold is “4”, and displays a special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 on the right side of the display area. Four hold icons PI2_1 to PI2_4 for FIG. 2 are displayed. Also, the display of the number of big hits and the display of the number of acquired balls are erased (not displayed).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 53 (53), in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 4- Decoration 1-Decoration 7 ") is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the power support state ends.

  During the period shown in FIG. 23 (54) to FIG. 57 (57), the effect display based on the variation pattern lottery table 0 is executed in the normal state (non-electric support state) (see “Variable putty” in FIG. 23 (54)). 0 (∞) ”).

  At the timing of FIG. 54 (54), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of symbols (eg, “decoration 4-decoration”) in the normal state (figure 15 (c) (3)). 1-decoration 7 ") is stopped.

  At this timing, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 lights up four LEDs, suggesting that the remaining hold is "4", and displays the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 below the display area. Four hold icons PI1_1 to PI1_4 for the special figure 1 are displayed. In addition, one special figure 2 hold is consumed, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 lights three LEDs to indicate that the remaining hold is "3". The change display corresponding to the held hold is executed. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, four hold icons PI2_1 to PI2_4 are still displayed.

  At this timing, the hitting suggestion display in the second hitting suggestion display area 720 displayed from the big hit game to the electric support period (the period shown in FIGS. 19 (3) to 23 (53)) is displayed. Hide.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 55 (55), the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the suspended special symbol 2 being suspended. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, the remaining three hold icons PI2_1 to PI2_3 are displayed.

  Further, at this timing, the hitting suggestion display is executed in the first hitting suggestion display area 710 provided on the front surface so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display. In this example, the hitting suggestion display is a display of the characters “please return to left-handed”, and informs the player that the period to be left-handed has started.

  At the timing of FIG. 56 (56), the decorative symbol variation display is continued in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the hitting suggestion display in the first hitting suggestion display area 710 is ended. (Hidden).

  At the timing of FIG. 57 (57), it is in a state after all the suspension of special figure 2 has been digested, and special figure 2 retention lamp 220 turns off all four LEDs and suggests that the suspension is “0”. The special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 is deleted. On the other hand, one special figure 1 hold is consumed, and the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 lights two LEDs to indicate that the remaining hold is “2”. The change icon CI of the hold is displayed, and two hold icons PI1_1 and PI1_2 for the special figure 1 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900.

  <Production display based on variation pattern lottery table>

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal state (non-electric support state), for example, during the electric support state (probability change state) that is started after the first big hit game is ended (FIGS. 19 (1) to (10)). In the series of effect displays (FIGS. 20 (11) to 23 (53)), the symbol variation is executed a plurality of times (for example, 150 times).

  Then, when the variation display is performed a plurality of times during the execution of the continuous effect display (FIG. 20 (11) to FIG. 23 (53)) during the electric support, the effect display is executed based on the plurality of variation pattern lottery tables. Is done. The series of effect displays includes a plurality of (for example, three) effect modes, and at least one of the effect modes includes a plurality of stages (for example, three levels) of effects. Multiple symbol variations are performed. This will be described in detail below.

  <Variation pattern lottery table>

  The special figure variation pattern lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 24 shows a special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table scenario determination table and a special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. FIG. 24A shows the relationship between the gaming state and the operation / non-operation state of the special figure display device. “Normal” in the gaming state is a low probability normal figure low probability state, and the special figure display devices (the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214) operate at the time of probability change and at short time (electric support). Both of the movements of the game are inactive, the game state is "short time" is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (electric support state), the special figure display device is not working when the probability change Will be in a state where it will operate up to 100 times of special figure variation game, the game state is "probability change" is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability substation support state), the special figure display device It shows that the operation at the time reduction is in a state of operating up to 150 special figure variable games.

  FIG. 24B shows a special figure variation pattern lottery table scenario determination table. This table shows the symbol type of the special figure determined by the success / failure determination and the gaming state at the time of the success / failure determination when the probability change operation region 808 passes, when the probability change operation region 808 does not pass, and when the determination result is out of place. And determined by.

  For example, when passing through the probability changing operation region 808, the game state is any of “normal”, “time saving”, and “probability changing”, and the symbol types are “special drawing A”, “special drawing B”, and “special drawing”. In either case of FIG. A ”, the probability variation table scenario is selected.

  In addition, when the probability change operation area 808 is not passed, the game state is any of “normal”, “short time”, and “probability change”, and the symbol types are “special illustration A”, “special illustration B”, and “ For any of the special figures “a”, the time reduction table scenario is selected.

  In addition, if the determination result is out of date, if the game state is “normal”, the normal table scenario is selected regardless of whether the symbol type is “special figure C” or “special figure b”. If the game state is “short time”, the short time table scenario is selected and the game state is “probable change” regardless of whether the symbol type is “special drawing C” or “special drawing b”. The probability variation table scenario is selected regardless of whether the symbol type is “Special Figure C” or “Special Figure b”.

  Here, the probability change table scenario and the time reduction table scenario are scenarios of effects displayed on the special figure display device in the special figure variation game started after the end of the big hit game or the special figure variation game in the probability transformation electric power support state. The normal table scenario is an effect scenario that is executed in the special figure variable game when the determination result is out of order in the special figure variable game in which the game state is “normal”.

  In addition, special figure variation pattern lottery table scenario, when the game state transitions (for example, the big hit state (special figure low probability normal figure low accuracy) ends, and transition to the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure high accuracy) It is only necessary to be configured to change to a normal state (such as when shifting to a normal state (special figure low-precision normal figure low-accuracy)). Further, the normal table scenario may not be set again when the determination result is “out of” in the normal state.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are cases where a plurality of symbol types that are jackpots, such as special figure A, special figure B, and special figure a, are mounted, and the special figure variation pattern lottery table scenario differs for each big hit symbol. I am doing so. By doing so, there are cases in which the player's interests can be improved with various effects.

  FIG. 24C shows a special figure variation pattern lottery table determination table. As shown in FIG. 24 (c), when the special figure variation pattern lottery table scenario is a normal table scenario, table 0 is selected as the special figure variation pattern lottery table regardless of the number of special figure fluctuation games (number of special figure fluctuations). Is done. When the special figure variation pattern lottery table scenario is a probability variation table scenario, when the special figure variation frequency after the big hit game is 1 to 84 times (the first 84 times), the table 1 is selected as the special figure variation pattern lottery table and 85 times (Next time) selects table 2, 86-89 times (next 3 times) selects table 3, 90 times (next time) selects table 4, 91 times (next time) 1), table 2 is selected again, 92 to 95 times (next 3 times), table 3 is selected again, 96 times (next 1 time), table 4 is selected again, 97 times (next time) 1), table 5 is selected, 98-99 times (next 2 times), table 6 is selected, 100 times (next time), table 7 is selected, 101-149 times (next 149) Times), table 8 is selected 150 times (the last one) in table 9 is selected.

  In addition, when the special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table scenario is a short-time table scenario, when the special figure fluctuation frequency after the big hit game is 1 to 99 times (the first 99 times), the table 8 is selected as the special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table. The table 9 is selected 100 times (the last one).

  In both the probability variation table scenario and the short time table scenario, the table 9 is selected as the special diagram variation pattern lottery table in the special diagram variation game of the last electric support (150th in the probability variation state and 100th in the time variation state). In the special figure fluctuation game in the case where the final fluctuation is off (special figure C, special figure b), the end effect of the electric support state (display of the number of acquired balls or the number of big hits (number of consecutive games)) may be performed. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table in each scenario is sequentially shifted to another special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table according to the number of special figure fluctuations.

  FIGS. 25A and 25B and FIGS. 26C to 26J show special figure variation pattern lottery tables (table 0 to table 9) stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. FIG. Of the tables 0 to 9 (also referred to as variable putty 0 to 9), the tables 1 to 9 correspond to a plurality of effect modes constituting a series of effect displays shown in FIGS. 20 (11) to 23 (57). Yes.

  First, FIG. 25A shows the table 0. Table 0 corresponds to the production (display) of the normal mode. FIG. 2B shows the table 1. Table 1 corresponds to the performance in the Echigoya search mode. FIG. 26C shows the table 2. Table 2 corresponds to the effects of the Echigoya tracking mode, and is selected for the first game and the eleventh game of the game. The “game” here is not the number of fluctuations but the number of games in production. FIG. 4D shows the table 3. Table 3 corresponds to the production of the Echigoya search mode, and is selected from the 2nd game to the 9th game and from the 12th game to the 19th game. FIG. 4E shows the table 4. Table 4 corresponds to the performance in the Echigoya search mode, and is selected for the 10th game and the 20th game. FIG. 5F shows the table 5. Table 5 corresponds to the performance in the Echigoya search mode, and is selected in the 21st game. FIG. 4G shows the table 6. Table 6 corresponds to the performance in the Echigoya search mode, and is selected in the 22nd game to the 23rd game. FIG. 4H shows the table 7. Table 7 corresponds to the performance in the Echigoya search mode, and is selected as the final game. FIG. 4I shows the table 8. Table 8 corresponds to the performance in the training mode. FIG. 6J shows the table 9. Table 9 corresponds to the production in the electric support last variation mode.

  In each table, a sub-table for lottery is determined and acquired in advance by a combination of the symbol type that is the result (stop symbol) of the special symbol variable game and the special symbol holding number at the start of the special symbol variable game. The timer type is determined by determining which random number selection range in the sub-table the lottery random number value is included in.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (c), the probability variation table scenario is composed of Table 1 to Table 9, and the effects thereof are Echigoya search mode (Table 1), Echigoya tracking mode (Table 2 to Table 7), The training mode (table 8) and the electric support final variation mode (table 9) are comprised of four modes.

  Furthermore, in the Echigoya tracking mode (the number of special figure fluctuations from the 85th rotation to the 100th rotation), effects are executed in three stages. That is, the 85th rotation is the table (transformation putty) 2, the 86th to 89th rotations are the table (transformation putty) 3, the 90th rotation is the table (transformation putty) 4, and the 91st rotation is the table (transformation putty). The second (92) to 95th rotation is the table (transformation putty) 3, the 96th rotation is the table (transformation putty) 4, the 97th rotation is the table (modification putty) 5, the 98th rotation to the 99th rotation is the table (Modified Putty) 6th and 100th rotations become a table (Modified Putty) 7; Modified Putty 2 to 4 (first stage of 85th rotation to 90th rotation), Modified Putty 2 to 4 (91st rotation to The stage is composed of three stages, that is, the second stage of the 96th rotation) and the variable putty 5-7 (the third stage of the 97th to 100th rotations).

  The time-saving table scenario is composed of a table 8 (1st to 99th rotation) and a table 9 (100th rotation), and the training mode for the 101st rotation to the 149th rotation of the probability variation table scenario and 150 for the probability variation table scenario. The same effect as the electric support last variation mode of the rotation is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25A, in the case of the table 0 (normal mode), the deviation (“special drawing C”, “special drawing b”) has a different timer (fluctuation time) depending on the number of holds (0 to 3). In the case of big hits ("Special Figure A", "Special Figure B", "Special Figure a"), a timer corresponding to a random value for each symbol type (regardless of the number of holds) Variation time) is selected.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 25B, in the case of Table 1 (Echigoya search mode), a different timer (fluctuation time) may be selected depending on the number of holds (0 to 3) for the deviation of “special drawing b”. Is a big hit ("Special Figure A", "Special Figure B", "Special Figure a"), and "Special Figure C", a random value for each symbol type regardless of the number of holds. A timer (variation time) corresponding to is selected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 26C to 26H, in Tables 2 to 7 (Echigoya tracking mode), a timer (variation time) corresponding to each symbol type is selected regardless of the number of holds. .

  In addition, in the case of Table 8 (training mode) as shown in FIG. 26 (i), a different timer (fluctuation time) may be selected depending on the number of holds (0 to 3) for the deviation of “special drawing b”. In the case of big hits ("Special Figure A", "Special Figure B", "Special Figure a") and "Special Figure C", a random value is set for each symbol type regardless of the number of holds. The corresponding timer (variation time) is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (j), in Table 9 (electric support last variation mode), a timer (variation time) corresponding to a random value is selected for each symbol type, regardless of the number of holds.

  FIG. 27 shows a timer table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  As shown in the figure, the time of timer 0 is 1500 ms, the time of timer 1 is 3000 ms, the time of timer 2 is 7500 ms, the time of timer 3 is 9500 ms, and the time of timer 4 is 11000 ms. Yes, the time of timer 5 is 12500 ms, the time of timer 6 is 14000 ms, the time of timer 7 is 19000 ms, the time of timer 8 is 22000 ms, the time of timer 9 is 23500 ms, The time is 33500 ms, the time of timer 11 is 91000 ms, the time of timer 12 is 140000 ms, the time of timer 13 is 200000 ms, the time of timer 14 is 19000 ms, the time of timer 15 is 36000 ms , Timer 16 time is 39500ms Yes, the time of timer 17 is 42500 ms, the time of timer 18 is 52000 ms, the time of timer 19 is 78500 ms, the time of timer 20 is 97000 ms, the time of timer 21 is 101500 ms, The time is 110000 ms, the time of timer 23 is 136000 ms, the time of timer 24 is 146000 ms, the time of timer 25 is 206000 ms, the time of timer 26 is 294000 ms, the time of timer 27 is 9500 ms The time of the timer 28 is 99500 ms, the time of the timer 29 is 109000 ms, and the time of the timer 30 is 134000 ms. Among these, in the special figure variable game with the variable times of timers 0 to 13 and timers 27 to 30, the effect of “out” is executed. In addition, in the special figure variable game of the timers 14 to 26, a “winning” effect is executed.

  Prior to the start of the special figure variable game, the main control unit 300 makes a determination as to whether the special figure variable game is a success or failure by using the determination table shown in FIG. Next, a lottery process is performed with reference to the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 to determine a stop symbol (symbol type). Next, any one of scenarios 0 to 4 is determined as a special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table scenario with reference to the special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table scenario determination table shown in FIG. Next, referring to the special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table determination table shown in FIG. 24C, the special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table is determined based on the number of special figure fluctuations. Next, referring to the determined special figure variation pattern lottery table (any one of FIGS. 25 (a), (b) and FIGS. 26 (c) to (j)), the result of the special figure variation game (stop symbol) Using the lottery sub-table determined by the combination of the symbol type and the special figure hold number at the start of the special-figure variable game, any random number in the sub-table can be selected in advance. The timer type is determined by judging whether it is included in the range, and the variation time based on the timer type is determined with reference to the timer table of FIG. Next, the main control unit 300, in the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process (step S225) or special figure 1 state update process (step S227)) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the special figure display device (the special figure 2 display device 214 or the special figure 1 display device 212) is turned on and off repeatedly, and is turned on and off, and the special figure is displayed only for the variation time based on the determined timer type. The change symbol display is executed, and the stop symbol form is stopped and displayed after the lapse of the change time.

  Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), the main control unit 300 sends various jackpot flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, general figure probability variation flags, etc. as command data to the first sub control unit 400. Value, information indicating the fluctuation time (timer value) of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the special figure-related lottery process, information on the special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table, and information on the remaining special figure fluctuation frequency in the probability substation support state The including symbol change start command is transmitted.

  In this way, the effects (displays) shown in FIGS. 19 to 23 are executed. Specifically, in the normal state (non-electric support state) shown in FIGS. 19 (1) to (10), the effect is executed based on the selection of the normal table scenario (table 0). In addition, from the first rotation to the 84th rotation in the electric support state shown in FIGS. 20 (11) to (18), an effect is executed based on the selection of table 1 (variable putty 1) of the probability variation table scenario, In the 85th rotation shown in FIGS. 20 (19) to (22), an effect is executed based on the selection of table 2 (variable putty 2) of the probability variation table scenario, and FIG. 21 (23) to FIG. In the 86th to 89th rotations shown in (25), an effect is executed based on the selection of the table 3 (variable putty 3) of the probability variation table scenario, which is shown in FIGS. 21 (26) to (28). The 90th rotation shown is based on the selection of table 4 (variable putty 4) of the probability variation table scenario, and the 90th rotation shown in FIGS. 21 (29) to (30) is the probability variation table. Scenario table 2 (weird putty 2) The effect is executed based on the selection, and the third rotation to the 95th rotation shown in FIGS. 21 (31) to (33), the table 3 (variable putty 3) of the probability variation table scenario is selected. An effect is executed based on that, and the effect is executed based on the selection of the table 4 (variable putty 4) of the 96th rotation and probability variation table scenario shown in FIGS. 21 (34) to 22 (35). In the 97th rotation shown in FIGS. 22 (36) to (37), an effect is executed based on the selection of the table 5 (variable putty 5) of the probability variation table scenario, and FIGS. In the 98th to 99th rotations shown in (42), an effect is executed based on the selection of the table 6 (variable putty 6) of the probability variation table scenario, which is shown in FIGS. 22 (43) to (45). The 100th rotation shown is the probability variation table. An effect is executed based on the selection of the Nario table 7 (odd putty 7). The 101st to 149th rotations shown in FIGS. 22 (46) to 23 (48) are the table 8 of the probability variation table scenario. An effect is executed based on the selection of (Change Putty 8), and the table 9 (Change Putty 9) of the probability change table scenario is selected for the 150th rotation shown in FIGS. 23 (49) to (53). In the normal state (non-electric support state) shown in FIGS. 23 (54) to (57), the effect is performed based on the selection of the normal table scenario (table 0). Executed.

  A series of effects of the probability variation table scenario includes the Echigoya search mode (FIGS. 20 (11) to 20 (18), the Echigoya tracking mode (FIGS. 20 (19) to 22 (44)), and the training mode (FIG. 22 (45)). ) To FIG. 23 (48)) and the electric support final variation mode (FIG. 23 (49) to FIG. 23 (53)), and the Echigoya tracking mode is the first stage (FIG. 20 (19) to FIG. 21). (28)) It is composed of the effects of the second stage (FIGS. 21 (29) to 22 (35)) and the third stage (FIGS. 22 (36) to 22 (44)).

  Further, during the Echigoya tracking mode (FIG. 20 (19) to FIG. 22 (44)), the hold icon and the fluctuation icon are not displayed.

  <Direction suggestion of how to hit>

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the variable display is performed a plurality of times during the execution of a series of (one) effect display (FIG. 20 (11) to FIG. 23 (53)) during the electric support, the effect is displayed. When the hold of special figure 1 and / or special figure 2 becomes “0” in the middle of the display, a hitting suggestion display (a hitting warning display, a hitting display, a hitting notification) is executed.

  In the middle of the effect display, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that both the hold of special figure 1 and the hold of special figure 2 have become “0”, and can prompt the player to launch appropriately. There is a case. This will be described in detail below. In addition, the “hit suggestion display” in this flowchart is a display that is displayed only for a predetermined period when the suspension of Special Figure 1 and / or Special Figure 2 becomes 0 during a predetermined period during the electric support (the first If there is a hitting suggestion display (second hitting suggestion display) that continues to be displayed regardless of the number of holds during the electric support, it is displayed in addition to that. is there.

  FIG. 28 is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of the Echigoya tracking mode launch suggestion setting process executed in the effect control process (step S309) of the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 9A.

  First, in step S1101, the hitting suggestion occurrence time is initialized. The hitting suggestion display (first hitting suggestion display) is, for example, started to be executed after 3 seconds from the stop display of the decorative design, and the hitting suggestion occurrence time is the time until the start of the hitting suggestion display It is.

  In step S1103 following step S1101, the number of suspensions of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the number of holds in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 acquired in step S1103 is a first number (here, “0”). If the number of holds is not 0, the process is terminated, and if the number of holds is 0, the process proceeds to step S1107.

  In step S1107, the fluctuation pattern information is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S1109. The variation pattern information is various pieces of information of the special figure variation pattern lottery table determination table in FIG.

  In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the production mode is “Echigoya tracking mode”. That is, it is determined whether or not the tables 2 to 7 of the special figure variation pattern lottery table are selected as the variation pattern information acquired in step S1107. If it is “Echigoya tracking mode” (when tables 2 to 7 are selected), the process proceeds to step S1111. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1113.

  In step S1111 following step S1109, a hitting generation time (for example, 3 seconds after the stop display of the decorative symbol, etc.) is set, and the process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variable display is performed a plurality of times during the execution of a series of (one) effect display (FIG. 20 (11) to FIG. 23 (53)) during the electric support, for example, A series of effect display is composed of a plurality of effect modes, and execution of effect display of at least one of these effect modes (here, “Echigoya tracking mode” shown in FIGS. 20 (19) to 23 (44)) is executed. When the variable display is performed a plurality of times during the display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both “0” in the middle of the production display (the production display of the “Echigoya tracking mode”). Executes the hitting suggestion display (first hitting suggestion display).

  Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that both the hold of special figure 1 and the hold of special figure 2 have become “0” in the middle of the effect display, and urge the player to launch appropriately. There are cases where it is possible. The hitting suggestion display is also referred to as a hitting warning display, a hitting indication, a hitting notification, a right strike suggestion display, or a left strike suggestion display.

  Here, the Echigoya tracking mode launch suggestion setting process is performed for a fixed time (for example, after the second special figure display device 214 stops) for the symbol display confirmation time of the special figure display device (for example, the second special figure display device 214). For example, it may be 500 ms, 0 ms, or may be different for each symbol)), or after a jackpot end display time has elapsed (for example, 12000 ms. It may be 0 ms. This may be different for each symbol) and is included in the process (effect control process S409) performed when the gaming state command transmitted from the main control unit 300 is received. If not, this process is not performed. Further, the time until the start of the hint suggestion display is updated by the setting timer update process in the effect control process S409.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of the effect display of the hitting suggestion display in time series. The figure shows the effect when the number of holds in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 becomes 0 during the period shown in FIGS. 21 (27) to (28) (during the 90th rotation of the Echigoya tracking mode). It is an example of a display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 29 (a) corresponds to FIG. 21 (27), and in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, the character “Yoshimune” in the back tracks the character “Echigoya” in the front. The effect to perform is executed, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed small in the lower right of the display area. At this timing, both the first special symbol hold lamp 218 and the second special symbol hold lamp 220 turn off all the LEDs, and both the hold in special figure 1 and the hold in special figure 2 are “0”. Suggests.

  The timing shown in FIG. 29 (b) corresponds to the timing corresponding to FIG. 21 (28), in the lower right corner of the display area, in the symbol combination (FIG. 15 (c) (2)) in the electric support state. For example, “decoration 7—decoration 2—decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed small.

  The timing shown in FIG. 29 (c) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the decorative symbol stop display in FIG. 29 (b). At this timing, the first hitting suggestion display (in this example, “please hit right”) is displayed in the first hitting suggestion display area 710 (in front of the background effect display) of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 29D shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the first hitting suggestion display in FIG. The first hitting suggestion display area 710 terminates the display when a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds) elapses from the start of display (becomes hidden or erased).

  Note that in the period shown in FIGS. 29A to 29D, the second hitting suggestion display area 720 provided in the upper left of the display area has a second hitting suggestion display (in this example, “ The characters “right-handed” and a right-pointing arrow) are continuously displayed. In the first hitting suggestion display, in addition to the second hitting suggestion display, the suspension of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is both “0”, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Starts to be displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed, the display is ended.

  Note that, in this example, the case where the first hitting suggestion display is executed when the suspension of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is both “0” has been described as an example, but FIG. 20 (11). As shown in FIG. 22 (22), when the special figure 1 is held in plural and only the special figure 2 hold becomes "0", that is, the special figure 2 hold is 0, and the special figure 1 hold is The first hitting suggestion display (first right hitting suggestion display) may be executed even when is 1 or more.

  Also, during a special mode limited to N rotations during the left-handed period (for example, 30 rotations after the end of the electric support enters a specific production mode (special variable putty different from the normal state, and after 30 rotations, the normal state is entered). Mode), etc.) may be executed, and in this case, the first left-hand suggestion display may be used.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (12), at the start of the first-round variable game (the first variable game) during the electric support, at least the special game of FIG. 2 (or FIG. 1) is suspended. In the case of “0”, a first hit suggestion display (for example, a first right strike suggestion display) may be displayed.

  The first hitting suggestion display (hitting strike warning display) displayed in the first hitting suggestion display area 710 includes a first right strike suggesting display that suggests a right strike and a first strike suggesting a left strike. There is a left-handed suggestion display.

  The first right-hand hit suggestion display is when the first symbol change starts after the end of the first big hit (and when the electric support (probability change / short time) rushes), or in the right-handed game state (for example, right-handed during the electric support) The game ball is detected by the sensor on the left side of the model (for example, entering the sensor of the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232 (hews), the gate (ordinary figure starting port 228), the winning port (attacker)) Displayed when

  In addition, the first left-handed suggestion display indicates that the game ball is detected by the right sensor at the start of the first rotation after the game state transitions from the short-time state to the normal state or right-handed game state (for example, non- This is displayed when the right gate (when entering the normal figure starting port 228), the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, the winning port (attacker), etc.) during the electric support.

  The timing for starting the first hit suggestion display is, for example, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a sub-command (variation start command) from the main control unit 300, but is not limited thereto. It may be the timing of receiving the jackpot end command or the symbol stop command of the short time final variation.

  <Direction of big hit round display>

  Next, the effect display of the big hit round display of this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, at least a jackpot for performing a round display effect (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “round jackpot”) is provided. When the jackpot is executed a plurality of times (for example, in the case of Renso, etc.), the round display effect during the jackpot round varies depending on the number of jackpot hits (for example, the number of pools). Is executed.

  Specifically, the round display effect (first type round display effect) of the present embodiment may execute the first effect display and the second effect display during the effect. When the jackpot (first jackpot) for performing the round display effect (first type round display effect) is executed a plurality of times, for example, the first jackpot (first jackpot) In the second round display effect, the first effect display is executed, and in the second big hit (first big hit) round display effect, a second effect display different from the first effect display is executed.

  By doing in this way, the effect display (first effect display, second effect display) that the player can see during the round display effect differs depending on the number of jackpots (for example, the number of consecutive resorts). May continue to entertain the player (even if the villa continues).

  Hereinafter, in the round display effect, the case where the character introduction effect display is performed as the first effect display and the second effect display will be described in detail.

  With reference to FIGS. 30 to 32, an example of the special winning opening opening process of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 30A is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of the special winning opening opening process of the present embodiment. The big prize opening process is a command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interruption process of the main control unit 300, when the big prize opening command transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is received. This is a process executed in the effect control process (step S309) of the first sub control unit main process.

  In step S1201, the round winning number is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1203. The number of round winning prizes is used, for example, for determining an opening end condition for terminating the opening of the big winning opening when a predetermined value is reached.

  In step S1203, the number of special electric utility operations is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S1205. The special electric combination (special electric combination) is a big hit round (control to electrically open the big prize opening), and one special electric operation corresponds to one round. That is, in the case of one big hit (one operation of the continuous actuating device (device for continuously operating the special electric character)) and the special electric character is operated 12 times, the number of rounds is 12R. A big hit. In addition, the condition device is a device for activating the accessory continuous operation device, which has a big hit design, or is mounted on a specific area (a pachinko machine called a winged object or a pachinko machine called a type 1 type 2 machine) The accessory continuous actuating device is actuated by passing through the (V region) (a big hit is started by satisfying the condition). In the case of the present embodiment, for example, after the stop display of the special figure A, both the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are activated. In addition, even if the jackpot symbol is aligned, only the condition device is activated, and if the game ball does not pass through a specific area, the accessory continuous activation device does not operate (that is, even if the symbol is aligned, If the game is not entered into a specific area, the jackpot will not be started and the game will be stopped in the “big hit confirmed” state.

  In step S1205, a big hit round box setting process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1207. The big hit round box setting process is a process for setting box data for executing a big hit round display effect and a liquid crystal command for the second sub control unit (liquid crystal control unit) 500, which will be described later.

  In step S1207, box data transmission processing for transmitting the box data (including the liquid crystal command) set in step S1205 to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed, and the processing ends.

  FIG. 30B is an example of a flowchart showing a process flow of the big hit round box setting process (step S1205) in the big prize opening opening process of FIG.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is a box for executing effects at the timing of each effect execution, such as at the start of fluctuation, at the time of hold change, at the time of notice effect, at the time of reach effect, at the time of button effect occurrence, at the time of jackpot round display effect, etc. Data is set in the box data setting area of the RAM 408.

  The box data is composed of a liquid crystal command and part data including information such as sound, light emission, and an accessory (movable body) that is executed in response to an effect based on the liquid crystal command. The liquid crystal command includes a command for causing the decorative design display device 208 to display an effect display corresponding to each effect process.

  The first sub-control unit 400 sets box data for the round display effect at the timing of executing the big hit round display effect (for each effect).

  In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (here, the door member of the second attacker 804) is open. If it is open, the process proceeds to step S1303, and if not open, the process proceeds to step S1305. move on. Even when the big prize opening is closed (when the “large prize opening closing process (not shown)” is executed in the first sub-control unit 400 by the reception of the big prize opening closing command transmitted from the main control unit 300). Since the process (big hit round box setting process) is executed, in this step S1301, the state of the big prize opening (open state or closed state) is determined.

  In step S1303 following step S1301, information to be displayed during the big hit round is set in the box data. The information to be set is, for example, the number of jackpots (renso) (for example, “BONUS × N” displayed in FIG. 20 (11)), the number of acquired balls (for example, “XXpt” in FIG. 20 (11), etc.) Display). That is, these pieces of information are set when the special winning opening is opened.

  In step S1305, various types of information such as the number of rounds, the presence / absence of winning in the probability variation operation area 808, and the symbol type of the special figure jackpot ("Special figure A", "Special figure B", or "Special figure a") are displayed. Acquire and go to step S1307.

  In step S1307, it is determined whether or not a big hit predetermined round (for example, 6R) for starting execution of the character introduction effect display has started. If it has started, the process proceeds to step S1309, and if not, the process is performed. finish.

  In step S1309 following step S1307, a character introduction effect setting process (character introduction setting process) is performed based on the various information acquired in step S1305.

  FIGS. 31 and 32 are diagrams for explaining the character introduction effect setting process (character introduction setting process), and FIG. 31A is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of the character introduction setting process. FIG. 31B and FIG. 32 are examples of the big hit character selection table.

  In step S1401, character introduction information is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S1403.

  In step S1403, it is determined whether or not the character introduction has been completed (if all of a plurality of existing characters have been introduced). If it has been completed, the process proceeds to step S1405. If not (if it has not been completed yet) If there is an unintroduced character), the process proceeds to step S1407.

  In step S1405, the character introduction information is cleared. In step S1407, the presence / absence of selected character introduction information is determined. If there is no selected character introduction information, the process proceeds to step S1409. If there is selected character introduction information, the process proceeds to step S1411.

  In step S 1409, “Yoshimune⇒ 爺”, which is the first (No. 0) data in the big hit character selection table shown in FIG. That is, if it is determined in step S1403 that the character introduction has been completed, or if the character introduction information has been cleared (for example, the first jackpot during probability change), the character for the first effect display is displayed. As the introduction information, the first (No. 0) data (here, “Yoshimune⇒ 爺”) of the big hit character selection table is set.

  In step S1411, a character introduction lottery process is performed. In this step, if it is determined in step S1403 that the character introduction has not been completed (if the character introduction information has not been cleared (for example, after the second big hit)), the next character introduction information (second effect) A lottery is performed to select (character introduction information for display). In the character introduction lottery process, using the jackpot character selection table shown in FIG. 0-No. 7 is selected.

  In step S1413, it is determined whether or not the character introduction information selected in step S1411 has been selected. If it has been selected, the process proceeds to step S1415. If not, the process proceeds to step S1417.

  In step S1415, the character introduction information next to the character introduction information selected in step S1411 is selected using the big hit character selection table shown in FIG. 14B, and the process returns to step S1413. For example, the character introduction information selected in step S1411 is No. 2 data (Kunoichi ⇒ Ninja). 2 is already selected (character introduction has been completed) (“Yes” in step S1413), in step S1415, No. in the character selection table in the big hit is selected. No. 2 next No. 2 The character introduction information of the data 3 (evil agent → Echigoya) is acquired, and the process returns to step S1413. In addition, No. acquired in step S1415. 3 is also selected (character introduction completed) (“Yes” in step S1413), in step S1415, No. of the character selection table in the big hit character selection table. No. 3 next No. 3 The character introduction information of the data No. 4 (Bancho⇒Kiyu) is acquired, and the process returns to step S1413. This is repeated to obtain character introduction information that has not been selected.

  In step S1417, the number of introduced characters is updated, and the process proceeds to step S1419. In step S1419, the selected character introduction information is set in the box data, and the process ends.

  FIG. 31B is an example of a big hit character selection table. The big hit character selection table includes items of “table number (No.)”, “random number selection range”, “character introduction information (character introduction)”, and “selection probability”.

  “Random number selection range” indicates a numerical range (0 to 100) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for selecting a character at the time of jackpot. “Character introduction information (character introduction)” indicates information of a character to be introduced, and “selection probability” indicates a probability that the character introduction information is selected.

  Specifically, the random selection range 0 to 11 (No. 0) is assigned the character introduction information “Yoshimune⇒ 爺”, and the selection probability is 12%. Here, the character introduction information “Yoshimune⇒ 爺” means that the character “Yoshimune” is introduced first, and then the character “爺” is introduced.

  Random number selection range 12 to 24 (No. 1) is assigned the character introduction information “Princess ⇒ Chibi Hime”, and its selection probability is 13%. Here, the character introduction information “Princess ⇒ Chibi princess” means that the character “Princess” is introduced first, followed by the character “Princess Chibi” (the same applies hereinafter).

  The random number selection range 25 to 36 (No. 2) is assigned the character introduction information “Kuichi⇒Ninja”, and its selection probability is 12%. The random selection range 37 to 49 (No. 3) is assigned the character introduction information “bad guy → Echigoya”, and the selection probability is 13%. The random number selection range 50 to 61 (No. 4) is assigned the character introduction information “Bancho ⇒ Shikita”, and the selection probability is 12%. The random selection range 62 to 74 (No. 5) is assigned the character introduction information “Teacher ⇒ principal”, and the selection probability is 13%. The random number selection range 75 to 87 (No. 6) is assigned the character introduction information “Mao ⇒Machiko-sensei”, and the selection probability is 12%. The random selection range 88 to 100 (No. 7) is assigned the character introduction information “Norio⇒Saki”, and the selection probability is 13%.

  In the above embodiment, the same character introduction selection lottery process (FIG. 31 (b)) is performed throughout the character introduction execution period (for example, 6R to 16R in the case where the character introduction effect is executed from the 6th R with 16R big hit). The case where the lottery process using one big hit character selection table shown in FIG.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character introduction execution period may be divided into a plurality of times, and the character introduction selection lottery process may be performed for each execution period. For example, when the character introduction effect is executed from the 6th R with a big hit of 16R, the character introduction execution period is divided into the first half (for example, 6R to 10R) and the second half (for example, 11R to 16R), and the character introduction selection for the first half is performed. The lottery process and the character introduction selection lottery process for the latter half may be performed. In this case, the big hit character selection tables used for the character introduction selection lottery process may be the same or different.

  FIG. 32 shows an example of the big hit character selection table when the character introduction execution period is divided into a plurality (for example, the first half and the second half) and the character introduction selection lottery process is performed for each execution period. ) Is an example of the first half (for example, 6R to 10R) big hit character selection table, and (b-1) and (b-2) in the second half (for example, 11R to 16R) are the big hit character selection tables. It is an example.

  The table shown in FIG. 11A is the same as the table shown in FIG. 31B, but is referred to in the character introduction selection lottery process in the first half (for example, 6R to 10R) of the character introduction execution period. Is.

  Further, the contents of the table shown in FIG. 11B-1 are the same as those shown in FIG. 31B, but the character introduction selection lottery process in the second half of the character introduction execution period (for example, 6R to 10R). Is referred to.

  On the other hand, the table shown in (b-2) in the figure is different from the table shown in (a) in the figure. For example, as a character introduction information, a movie constituting a story is assigned according to a random value. It is what.

Specifically, the random introduction selection range 0 to 11 (No. 0) is assigned the character introduction story “Yoshimune and Aoi Movie”, and its selection probability is 12%. The random selection range 12 to 24 (No. 1) is assigned the character introduction story “Princess and Little Princess Movie”, and its selection probability is 13%. In the random number selection range 25 to 36 (No. 2), the character introduction story “Kunoichi and Ninja Movie” is assigned, and its selection probability is 12%. The random selection range 37 to 49 (No. 3) is assigned the “bad actor and Echigoya movie” of the character introduction story, and its selection probability is 13%. In the random number selection range 50 to 61 (No. 4), the “Introductory movie for the character introduction story” is assigned, and the selection probability is 12%. The random selection range 62 to 74 (No. 5) is assigned the character introduction story “Mr. Tsuji and the principal movie”, and its selection probability is 13%. The random selection range 75 to 87 (No. 6) is assigned the character introduction story “Osamu and Machiko-sensei movie”, and its selection probability is 12%.
The random selection range 88 to 100 (No. 7) is assigned the character introduction story “Norio and Saki Movie”, and the selection probability is 13%.

  For example, when the character introduction selection lottery process is executed using the same figure (a) and the same figure (b-1), the character introduction selection lottery for the first half is referred to by referring to the table of FIG. The process is executed, and the character introduction selection lottery process for the second half is executed with reference to the table of FIG.

  In this case, among the character introductions that make a round, for the first (first) character introduction, the table No. Starting from 0 (the lottery for the second and subsequent rounds), the second half is table no. 0-No. Any one of 7 may be determined by lottery (the lottery after the second). In addition, the lottery performed in the second half is the table No. selected in the first half. (Character) may not be selected or may be selected. Note that the table No. selected in the first half. (Character) may be selected unconditionally even in the latter half.

  In addition, when the character introduction selection lottery process is executed using the same figure (a) and the same figure (b-2), the character introduction selection lottery for the first half is referred to by referring to the table of FIG. The process is executed, and the character introduction selection lottery process for the second half is executed with reference to the table of FIG. By referring to the table in FIG. 5B-2, the character introduction effect can be executed in the first half, and the movie in which the story in which the character introduced in the first half appears can be executed in the second half.

  In this case as well, for the first (first) character introduction among the character introductions that make a round, the table No. Starting from 0 (the lottery for the second and subsequent rounds), the second half is table no. 0-No. Any one of 7 may be determined by lottery (the lottery after the second). In addition, the lottery performed in the second half is the table No. selected in the first half. (Character) may not be selected or may be selected. Note that the table No. selected in the first half. (Character) may be selected unconditionally even in the latter half.

It is not always necessary to select the same effect (for example, table No. 0 in FIG. 5A) in the first (6R first time (first time)) character introduction effect, and the first character is determined by lottery. Also good.
<Example of character introduction effect display>

  33 to 34 are diagrams showing an example of character introduction effect display in time series. Here, as an example, the N-th round big hit (the first big hit, for example, the actual 16R positive change big hit) is won in the 90th turn variable game during probability change shown in FIG. 21 (27) (FIG. 33 (a)). ) To (d)) to execute the round display effect (FIG. (E) to FIG. 34 (t)), and then win the N + 1 round big hit (first big hit, for example, 16R probability variable big hit). (FIG. 34 (u)) is an example of the effect display when the round display effect (FIG. 34 (v) to FIG. 34 (w)) is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 33 (a) is, for example, the timing corresponding to FIG. 21 (27), which is a state in which the 90th variable game is being executed, and is displayed on the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Below, the variation display of the decorative design is displayed small.

  The periods shown in FIGS. 4B to 4D show a state in which the jackpot effect is being executed based on the fact that the variable game in FIG. 4A has won the jackpot (for example, the actual 16R probability variable jackpot). . The jackpot is a jackpot (first jackpot, round jackpot) for executing a round display effect. Further, the first big hit at this timing is the first big hit of the Nth time (for example, the first time) during the probability change. In FIG. 8D, the symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) which is a substantial 16R probability variation big hit by the ornamental symbol in the electric support state (FIGS. 15C and 2) is stopped and displayed. It is informed that the actual 16R probability change big hit (Nth real 16R probability change big hit) has been won.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state in which the first jackpot effect has been started. In this example, the characters “Super Yoshimune Bonus” are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which execution of the round display effect is started. This round display effect is a first type of round display effect in which a character introduction effect display (first effect display, second effect display) is executed during the effect.

  At this timing, for example, a round effect is displayed near the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, “Round effect” is displayed). Above the display area, a second right-hand suggestion display is performed in the second hitting suggestion display area 720, and the number of jackpots (number of consecutive resorts) is also displayed (here, “BONUS × 1” is displayed). The number of acquired balls is displayed (here, “990 pt” is displayed) and the round is displayed (here, “1R” is displayed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G is a state in which a round display effect is being executed after the third round has been completed. At this timing, a display that suggests that the attacker unit 810 will be released from the next round (4R) (in this example, a character “Aim at the V attacker in the next round” and a downward-pointing arrow) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is a state in which the round display effect that the fourth round starts is being executed. At this timing, a display for notifying that the attacker unit 810 is open (in this example, a character “Aim at the V attacker!” And a downward-pointing arrow) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (i) shows a state in which a winning change operation region (V winning region) 808 is won at 4R, and the timing shown in FIG. 6 (j) shows a state in which 5R has started.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (k) shows the state where the 6Rth has started. At this timing, the state where the character introduction effect display is started is shown as one effect of the round display effect (first type of round display effect). In this example, a switching display for character introduction (for example, The image of the book opened and the display of the characters “character introduction” are executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11L is in the middle of the 6th R, and the table No. of the big hit character selection table shown in FIG. Based on 0 (“Yoshimune⇒ 爺”), the character introduction effect is shown. In this example, the image of the character “Yoshimune” and the characters “Yatsushiro Shoji who governs the world of Yoshimune” are displayed, and the introduction effect of the character “Yoshimune” is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 34 (m) is a state in the middle of the 9th R, and shows a state where the character introduction effect of the character “Yoshimune” is continued. In this example, an image of a character “Yoshimune” on a horse and a character “Yoshimune with a strong sense of justice” are displayed.

  The timings shown in (n) to (o) in the figure are in the middle of the 9th R, and the table number of the big hit character selection table shown in FIG. Based on 0 (“Yoshimune ⇒ 爺”), the state where the character introduction effect is continued is shown. During this period, the character to be introduced changes from “Yoshimune” to “爺”. That is, after the same switching display as in FIG. 33 (k) is performed in (n) in the same figure, in FIG. (O), the image of the character “爺” and “the most trustworthy vassal from Yoshimune Tsuji” are displayed. The characters “爺” are displayed and the introduction effect of the character “爺” is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (p) is in the middle of the 13th R, and the table number of the big hit character selection table shown in FIG. Based on 0 (“Yoshimune⇒ 爺”), the character introduction effect of the character “爺” is continued. In this example, an image of the character “爺” and a character “爺 favorite type Hakunoichi” are displayed.

  The timings shown in (q) to (r) in the figure are in the middle of the 13th R, and the table No. of the big hit character selection table shown in FIG. Based on 0 (“Yoshimune ⇒ 爺”), the state where the character introduction effect is continued is shown. During this period, the character to be introduced changes from “爺” to “Yoshimune”. That is, after the same switching display as in FIG. 33 (k) is performed in FIG. (Q), the same display as in FIG. 33 (l) (the image of the character “Yoshimune” and “ The display of the character “Yatsushiro Shoji who governs the world of Yoshimune” is performed, and the character “Yoshimune” is introduced again.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6S is a state in which the 16th R has been completed, and shows a state where the character introduction effect of the character “Yoshimune” is continued. In this example, the same display (display of the image of the character “Yoshimune” on the horse and the character “Yoshimune Masayoshi's strong sense of justice and passionate character of Bunmu Road”) is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (t) shows a state in which the Nth big hit (the first big hit for the Nth time, for example, the first round big hit during probability change) is completed. Here, the characters “Yoshimune RUSH continuation !!” are displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (u) is the N + 1th (for example, the second and subsequent) big hit (N + 1th) in the first to a plurality of variable games (during probability change) after the timing shown in FIG. The first big hit and round big hit) are shown. At this timing, the symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) which is a substantial 16R probability variation big hit by the ornamental symbols in the electric support state (FIGS. 15C and 2) is stopped and displayed. We are informing you that you have won the jackpot.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (v) shows a state in which 6R for the (N + 1) th round big hit has started. At this timing, the state where the character introduction effect display is started again as one effect of the round display effect (the first type of round display effect) is shown, and a switching display for character introduction (for example, opening a book) (Displaying the image in the state and the characters “character introduction”).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (w) is in the middle of the 6Rth, and the table No. of the big hit character selection table shown in FIG. 4 (“Bancho ⇒ Shijie”) indicates a state where the character introduction effect is being executed. In this example, an image of the character “Bancho” and a character of “Kan Kongo private third-year senior high school student” are displayed and an introduction effect of the character “Bancho” is executed. Although illustration is omitted, in the subsequent rounds, the character to be introduced changes from “Bancho” to “Kurakuri”.

  In this example, when the N-th big hit is, for example, the first round big hit during probability change, or after the character introduction is completed (characters in all tables of the big hit character selection table shown in FIG. 31B). Is the next round jackpot. Accordingly, “Yes” is set in step S1407 of the character initial setting process in FIG. 31A, and in step S1409, the first table (table No. 0) of the big hit character selection table shown in FIG. 31B is selected. In this example, the character introduction effect of “Yoshimune⇒ 爺” is executed.

  In the (N + 1) th big hit, “No” is determined in step S1407 of the character initial setting process of FIG. 31A, and the character introduction lottery process is executed in step S1411, and the big hit character selection shown in FIG. 31B is executed. Among the tables, the table No. No. 4 is selected, and the character introduction effect of “Bancho⇒Kiyu” is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, for example, in the jackpot round display effect (first type of round display effect) during probability change, the character introduction effect display is executed during the effect. The character introduction effect display is a case where a first effect display (for example, an introduction effect display of “Yoshimune⇒ 爺”) is executed by a character to be introduced, and a second effect display different from the first effect display (for example, , “Introduction effect display of“ Bancho ⇒ Shitoi ”” may be executed.

  Then, when the big hit (first big hit) for performing the round display effect (first type round display effect) is executed a plurality of times, the Nth (for example, first) big hit (first big hit) In the round display effect, the first character introduction effect display (first effect display) is executed (FIGS. 33 (k) to (s)), and the N + 1th (for example, second) jackpot (first jackpot) In the round display effect, a second character introduction effect display (second effect display) different from the first effect display is executed (FIGS. 34 (v) to (w)).

  By doing so, the character introduction effect display (first effect display, second effect display) that the player can see during the round display effect differs depending on the number of jackpots (for example, the number of consecutive games). In some cases, the player can be entertained even if the big hits continue (even if the consecutive villas continue).

  Also, for example, the character introduction during the first jackpot round during the probability change always starts from a specific character (for example, the main character of the content), and the character introduction during the second jackpot round during the probability change is a specific character ( Characters other than the protagonist) can be drawn for each big round and executed randomly. Therefore, even a player who is not familiar with the content that constitutes the round display effect may be able to enjoy the content of the round display effect because the character introduction during the first big hit round is always started by the main character. is there.

  In the above example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (l) to 34 (s), during the Nth character introduction effect display (first effect display), a table of one big hit character selection table. (For example, No. 0), the character introduction (“Yoshimune⇒ 爺 ⇒Yoshimune ...”) is repeatedly executed, but may not be repeatedly executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 33 (l) and 34 (m), the same character is composed of a plurality of introduction effect displays, but may be composed of one introduction effect display. The same applies to the character introduction effect display (second effect display) after the (N + 1) th time. Further, the character introduction (“Yoshimune⇒ 吉 ⇒Yoshimune ...”) is repeatedly executed at the Nth time, and it is not necessary to repeat the character introduction at the N + 1th time and thereafter, for example, “Bancho⇒Kotomo”.

  Although illustration is omitted, the jackpot that won't be the target of the character introduction effect during the probability change (the jackpot that does not execute the character introduction effect (second jackpot), the special one jackpot) was won, and the probability change continued. In this case, even if a big hit (first big hit, for example, a substantial 16R big hit) is executed during the probability change that has entered, the character introduction setting process in step S1405 of FIG. The selection information in the table (character) of the big hit character selection table may not be cleared and the information may be maintained. In addition, when a big hit (second big hit) that is not the target of the character introduction effect is sandwiched (when the first big win is won after the second big hit), the selection information of character introduction in step S1405 is cleared. You may be comprised so that.

  <Display example of pseudo-variation (pseudo-ream) production>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, a display example of the pseudo continuous variation effect in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the present embodiment, a pseudo variation (a so-called “pseudo sequence”) that makes it appear that a symbol combination corresponding to a deviation is stopped and displayed using the decorative symbol display device 208 a plurality of times during one special symbol variation display. In some cases, during the execution of the pseudo-ream, the pseudo-ream effect may be executed by displaying a decorative pattern for the pseudo-ream.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of pseudo-continuous production in the present embodiment in time series.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6A shows, for example, the state of the variable game shown in FIG. 1, and the decorative symbol variable display is executed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, the variable icon CI is displayed in the variable icon display area 800 below the display area, and the hold icon corresponding to the remaining hold in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 (or the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902). PI1 and PI2 are displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state in which the pseudo-continuous production is started. In this example, using the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed, and the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device (display area) The character (bancho) who appeared from the above punches “decoration 1” temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c from the bottom, and executes a pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect in which the right ornament symbol is changed again.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5C, a pseudo-continuous decorative symbol 930 (here, an image of the character “Yoshimune” in the frame) is displayed instead of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is a state (effect that suggests that the second pseudo-continuation will be started). At this timing, the change icon display area 800 (change icon CI) and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 (hold icons PI1, PI2) are also continuously displayed. Further, at least a part of the fluctuation icon display area 800 (fluctuation icon CI) and the special figure 1 holding icon display area 900 (holding icons PI1 and PI2) are displayed so as to overlap the front of a part of the pseudo-continuous decorative pattern 930. (Overlapping).

  The timing shown in FIG. 9D is also in a state where the pseudo-continuous decorative pattern 930 (here, the image of the character “Yoshimune” and the character “continue”) is displayed. Even at this timing, at least a part of the fluctuation icon display area 800 (fluctuation icon CI) and the special figure 1 holding icon display area 900 (holding icons PI1 and PI2) overlap with the front of a part of the decorative pattern 930 for pseudo-continuous use. Is displayed (overlapping).

  FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating another example of the pseudo-continuous effect according to the present embodiment in time series.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5A shows a state in which the pseudo-continuous production is started during the variable game shown in FIG. In this example, using the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, an effect (reach effect) for temporarily displaying “decoration 1” is executed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5B, normal reach is started, and “decoration 2” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208 together with the pseudo-religious ornamental symbol 930 (here, the image of the character “Yoshimune” in the frame). It is in a state of being cut in from the left and right of the area. At this timing, the fluctuation icon display area 800 (fluctuation icon CI) and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 (hold icons PI1 and PI2) are not displayed (deleted).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is such that “decoration 1” is temporarily stopped and displayed using the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the middle symbol display is performed. The pseudo-continuous decorative pattern 930 is displayed in the area 208b.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 4D and 4E are in a state in which a pseudo-continuous decorative symbol 930 is displayed in a large size instead of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the same figure (d), for example, an image of the character “Yoshimune” in the frame is displayed as the pseudo-decorative decorative pattern, and in the same figure (e), the image of the character “Yoshimune” and the “continuation” character) are displayed. it's shown. Also at this timing, the fluctuation icon display area 800 (fluctuation icon CI) and the special figure 1 holding icon display area 900 (holding icons PI1, PI2) are not displayed (deleted).

  As shown in FIGS. 35 (c), (d) and 36 (d), (e), in the present embodiment, when displaying the pseudo-continuous decorative symbol 930, the position is displayed at a position that differs depending on the effect. May be.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating the display position of the decorative pattern 930 for pseudo continuous use. A rectangular alternate long and short dash line indicates the range of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 that is visible to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), when the display related to the hold (the change icon display area 800, the change icon CI, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900, the hold icon PI) is not executed during the pseudo-continuation, The decoration symbol 930 is displayed at a predetermined reference position (reference position shown in the figure) of the display area (FIGS. 36D and 36E). In this example, the reference position is a position where all of the pseudo decorative symbols 930 are displayed in the display area and are visible to the player.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), when the display related to the hold (the change icon display area 800, the change icon CI, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900, the hold icon PI) is executed in the pseudo-group, The quasi-continuous decorative pattern 930 is displayed, for example, shifted upward from the reference position of the display area ((b) in the figure). In addition, at least a part of the display related to the hold (the change icon display area 800, the change icon CI, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900, the hold icon PI) overlaps with at least a part of the decorative pattern 930 for pseudo-continuous use (overload). Wrapped) is displayed (FIGS. 35 (c) and (d)). In this example, by displaying the quasi-continuous decorative symbol 930 shifted from the reference position, a part of the decorative symbol 930 is outside the display area and cannot be visually recognized by the player.

  Note that the direction in which the pseudo-decoration decorative pattern 930 is shifted differs depending on the position where the display related to the hold is displayed. That is, the display is shifted in a direction to avoid the display related to the hold. In other words, when the display related to the hold is displayed on the right (or left) of the display area, the pseudo-continuous decorative symbol 930 is shifted to the right (or left) from the reference position (FIG. 37 (a)). (In this case as well, at least a part of the display related to the hold is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) a part of the pseudo decorative pattern 930.

  In the above embodiment, the case of the variable display shown in FIG. 1 has been described as an example, but the variable display shown in FIG.

  <Pre-read lottery information that can be overwritten>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 50, an example of the prefetching (notice) effect in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, prior to the start of the special figure variable game, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a prefetch result information command (prefetch command) from the main control unit 300 and is included in the prefetch result information command. Various information of the prefetch result information command (special chart 1 and special chart 2 types, jackpot type, the number of prefetchs stored in the prefetch number storage area, the symbol type related to the prefetch result (stop symbol), timer value (variation time) On the basis of the information), the prefetch lottery information table (described later) is updated.

  FIG. 38A is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of the special figure 2 prefetch result information command (prefetch command) reception process of this embodiment, and FIG. 38B shows the flow of the special figure 2 pending winning process. It is an example of the flowchart to show.

  The special figure 2 prefetch result information command (prefetch command) receiving process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1501, special figure 2 reservation winning process ((b) in the figure) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1503.

  In step S1503, a process for setting the number of holds in the box data is performed. In step S1505, a box data transmission process is performed, and the process ends.

  The special figure 2 reservation winning process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1601, based on the various information (prefetch command information) of the received prefetch result information command, a prefetch command information storage destination provided in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (predetermined for setting in a prefetch lottery information table described later). Storage area) is designated, and the process advances to step S1603.

  In step S1603, the pre-read command information of the set storage destination is cleared. For example, if the winning is on hold 3, the prefetch command information of the storage destination of hold 3 is cleared.

  In step S1605, the acquired prefetch command information (type of special figure 1 and special figure 2, jackpot type, prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area, symbol type (stop symbol) related to the prefetch result, timer value (variation time) ) Etc.) is set as a predetermined storage location.

  In step S1607, the remaining number information of the special figure variable game is acquired, and in step S1609, the probability information (high probability, low probability) of the special figure is acquired.

  In step S1611, the jackpot type of the prefetch command information is reset according to the current jackpot probability. The big hit probability is, for example, 1/320 in the special figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 1/32 in the special figure high probability state (electric support state). Even a random number value that is out of place in the (normal state) may win in the electric support state (high probability state).

  In step S1613, if there is jackpot information in the hold excluding the change, prefetching (prefetching advance notice) is not performed, so whether or not there is jackpot information for the hold excluding the change is determined.

  In step S1615, pre-reading (pre-reading advance notice) is not performed after power interruption / recovery or after the power support state is completed. Therefore, it is determined whether there is a hold including undecided information. The process proceeds to S1617, and if not, the process proceeds to Step S1619.

  In step S <b> 1617, “Undetermined” is set for the hold including undetermined information. Note that prefetching is not performed for “undecided” hold.

  In step S1619, the prefetch category number in the hold is updated. In this step, when the prefetch target hold is a hold whose change time varies depending on the number of hold, the prefetch category number of the predetermined storage area (prefetch command information storage destination) of the RAM 408 is excluded from the prefetch target. Set to “0”. Further, when the prefetch target hold is a hold whose change time does not change depending on the number of hold, a prefetch category number corresponding to the hold change time (see the prefetch correction information acquisition table shown in FIG. 42 described later) is acquired. And set.

  In step S1621, one of the special figure fluctuation pattern lottery tables shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 is acquired based on the symbol type, the number of holds, etc., and in step S1623, the special figure 2 prefetch lottery process is performed and the process ends. .

  Next, the special figure 2 prefetch lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of the special figure 2 look-ahead lottery process.

  In step S1701, prefetching related information set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is initialized. The prefetching related information includes prefetching lottery determination information (see step S1709).

  In step S1703, it is determined whether or not a big hit. If it is a big hit, the process is terminated; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1705.

  In step S1705, it is determined whether or not a normal state (non-electric support state). If it is in the normal state, the process is terminated; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1707.

  In step S1707, based on the special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table acquired in step S1621, it is determined whether or not a predetermined effect mode (for example, “Echigoya search mode”) is determined, and a predetermined effect mode (for example, “Echigoya search” is determined). Mode "), the process proceeds to step S1709; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1715.

  In step S1709, prefetch lottery determination information is set. The pre-read lottery determination information determines whether there is a hold containing undecided information (undecided hold) or a hold containing jackpot information (big hit hold) in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 holds. When there is no big hit hold, “prefetch lottery is impossible” is set, and “prefetch lottery is possible” is set otherwise.

  In step S1711, it is determined based on the prefetch lottery determination information set in step S1709 whether or not the prefetch lottery is outside the scope of the prefetch lottery (when “prefetch lottery is not possible” is set). The process ends, and if not (when “prefetch lottery is possible” is set), the process proceeds to step S1713.

  In step S1713, prefetch lottery processing is executed in the “Echigoya search mode”, and the flow proceeds to step S1723.

  In step S1715 that follows when it is determined in step S1707 that the effect mode is not “Echigoya search mode” (No), it is determined whether or not the effect mode is “Echigoya tracking mode”. If it is in “Echigoya tracking mode”, the process is terminated; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1717.

  In step S1717, prefetch lottery determination information is set. In subsequent step S1719, based on the prefetch lottery determination information set in step S1717, it is determined whether or not the prefetch lottery is out of scope. If the prefetch lottery is out of scope (if “prefetch lottery is not allowed” is set). The process ends, and if not (when “prefetch lottery is possible” is set), the process proceeds to step S1721.

  In step S1721, a pre-read lottery process is executed when the effect mode is the “training mode”.

  In the subsequent step S1723, the result of the prefetch lottery is set in the prefetch lottery information setting table provided in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408. The prefetch lottery information setting table will be described later. When prefetching is executed, “0” indicating “overwrite prohibited” is set in “prefetch correction information” in the prefetch lottery information setting area. In addition, when the production mode is “training mode” and the variation time is 7.5 seconds, “preconditioning correction information” in the prefetch lottery information setting area is set to “conditional” regardless of whether or not prefetching is executed. “2” indicating that “overwrite is possible with” is set (see FIGS. 42C and 45 to 49).

  In step S1725, it is determined whether or not the prefetch lottery is not won. If so (if the prefetch lottery is not won), the process proceeds to step S1727; otherwise (if the prefetch lottery is won). The process ends.

  In step S1727, a prefetch correction information setting process (described later) is performed, and the process ends. As described above, when the prefetch lottery is not won (when prefetching is not performed), the acquired prefetch correction information is set in a prefetch lottery information table described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40A, the special figure 1 prefetch lottery process will be described. This figure is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of the special figure 1 prefetch lottery process.

  In step S1801, prefetch related information including prefetch lottery determination information is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S1803.

  In step S1803, it is determined whether or not it is in the electric support state. If so, the process ends. If not (if it is in the non-electric support state), the process proceeds to step S1805.

  In step S1805, prefetch lottery determination information is set, and the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1807, based on the pre-read lottery determination information set in step S1805, it is determined whether or not the pre-read lottery is excluded. If the pre-read lottery is not included (if “pre-read lottery is not allowed”), the process is performed. If not (if “prefetch lottery is possible” is set), the process proceeds to step S1809.

  In step S1809, a prefetch lottery process is performed, and in step S1811, a prefetch lottery result is set in a prefetch lottery information setting table provided in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408. When prefetching is executed, “0” is set in “prefetch correction information” in the prefetch lottery information setting area.

  In step S1813, it is determined whether or not the prefetch lottery is not won. If so (if the prefetch lottery is not won), the process proceeds to step S1815; otherwise (if the prefetch lottery is won). The process ends.

  In step S1815, a prefetch correction information setting process is performed, and the process ends. As described above, when the prefetch lottery is not won (when prefetching is not performed), the acquired prefetch correction information is set in a prefetch lottery information table described later.

  Next, the prefetch correction information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of prefetch correction information setting processing.

  In step S1901, the prefetch correction information corresponding to the prefetch category is set in the prefetch lottery information setting table (see FIGS. 45 to 49) based on the prefetch correction information acquisition table shown in FIG. The prefetch correction information acquisition table will be described in detail later, and the table has items of “prefetch category” and “prefetch correction information”. In the “prefetch category”, a value corresponding to the pending change time is set. Based on the change time of the hold prefetch command information, the value of “prefetch correction information” corresponding to the “prefetch category” (0 to 2). ) Is set in the prefetch lottery information setting table.

  In step S1903, it is determined whether or not the winning prefetch correction information is “0”. If so, the process proceeds to step S1905. If not, the process proceeds to step S1907.

  In step S1905, the pre-read correction information for the hold before the winning hold (hold added before the winning hold) is set (overwritten) to “0”.

  In step S1907, which proceeds to the case of No in step S1903, it is determined whether or not the winning pre-read correction information that has been won is “1”. If so, the process ends. The process proceeds to S1909.

  In step S1909, it is determined whether or not “2” is set in the pre-read correction information for the hold prior to the winning hold, and if “2” is set, the process proceeds to step S1911. The process ends.

  In step S 1911, if there is a hold before the winning hold and “2” is set in the correction information, the previous correction before “2” is set in the correction information to be digested first. All pending pre-read correction information is changed (overwritten) to “0”, and the process ends. As a result, when there are a plurality of correction information “2” s due to an increase in holdings in the pre-read lottery information table, the correction information for all the holdings before the holding of the correction information previously set to “2”. Is changed to “0”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the special figure variation start command receiving process will be described. FIG. 5A is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of the special figure variation start command receiving process, and FIG. 6B is an example of the flowchart showing the flow of the variation start lottery process.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes a pre-read lottery at the start of change (when a special figure change start command is received).

  Referring to FIG. 6A, in the special figure variation start command reception process, the hold information is updated (subtracted from the number of holds) in step S2001, and the change start lottery process is executed in step S2003. Thereafter, in step S2005, a process for setting the number of holds in the box data is performed. In step S2007, a box data transmission process is performed. In step S2009, a fourth symbol variation start process is performed.

  The variation start lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S2101, the lottery information set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is cleared.

  In step S2103, the time until the start of the hitting suggestion display (the hitting suggestion occurrence time, see step S1111 in FIG. 28) is cleared.

  In step S2105, a pre-read lottery determination flag (a flag for determining whether or not it has been determined) is set. In step S2107, background information (such as effect information for background display) at the start of variation is set based on the effect mode. To do.

  In step S2109, prefetch correction information in the prefetch lottery information setting table is determined for all suspensions, lottery information to be described later is set (for example, “changing eyes”, etc.), and correction information is “2”. And the correction information of the hold before the hold is updated (changed or overwritten) to “0”. In addition, when there is a hold before the winning hold and “2” is set in the correction information, all of the hold before the hold where “2” is set in the correction information to be digested first The pending prefetch correction information is updated to “0” (changed or overwritten). If a background mode (hereinafter referred to as “special background mode”) that only performs a prefetch notice depending on the background is installed, if the background information is set to the special background mode in step S2107, all the suspensions are set in step S2109. The correction information may be updated (changed or overwritten) to “0”. If the background information is set to the normal background mode (background mode for performing pre-reading notice independent of background. There may be a plurality of background modes) in step S2107, the process of step S2109 is performed.

  In step S2111, box data for background display is set, and in step S2113, hold change position information (information for changing the display position of each hold in accordance with increase / decrease in hold) is set in the box data.

  In step S2115, it is determined whether or not it is in the non-electric support state. If so (proceeding in the non-electric support state), the process proceeds to step S2117. If not (in the electric support state), the process proceeds to step S2119. .

  In step S2117, which proceeds when it is determined in step S2115 that the non-electric support state is determined, a normal time fluctuation start effect lottery process (lottery of the change notice, reach, etc.) is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S2125. On the other hand, in step S2119, which is performed when it is determined in step S2115 that the power support state has been determined, a power start change start effect lottery process (a lottery for such change notice, reach, etc.) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2121.

  In step S2121, the information for displaying the time reduction number (information for displaying the remaining number of time reductions) is set in the box data. In step S2123, the information for time reduction end display is set in the box data. The short time end display information is information for displaying, for example, the number of jackpots or the number of acquired balls.

  In step S2125 following step S2117 and step S2123, the change start information is set in the box data, and the process ends.

  FIG. 42 shows an example of a prefetch correction information acquisition table for setting the prefetch correction information in the prefetch lottery information setting table (see FIGS. 45 to 49).

  (A) in the figure is in the normal state (non-electric support state), (b) in the figure is in the electric support state and the production mode is “Echigoya search mode”, and (c) is in the electric support state. The look-ahead correction information acquisition table that is referred to when the rendering mode is the “tracking mode”. Further, the right figure of FIG. 9A shows the correspondence relationship between the value of the prefetch correction information and whether or not the prefetch correction information can be overwritten. As shown in the right diagram of FIG. 5A, when the value of the prefetch correction information is “0”, overwriting of the prefetch correction information is prohibited, and when the value of the prefetch correction information is “1”, the prefetch correction information is displayed. When the value of the prefetch correction information is “2”, the prefetch correction information can be overwritten under certain conditions.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C, the prefetch correction information acquisition table has items of “prefetch category” and “value of prefetch correction information when prefetch is not won”. In the “look-ahead category”, a value corresponding to the pending fluctuation time is set. Note that “value of prefetch correction information when prefetching is won” is “0” except in the case of special conditions described later, and is not shown. In addition, when the production mode is “Echigoya tracking mode”, no prefetching is performed, so there is no prefetch correction information acquisition table.

  For example, in the normal state, the value of “prefetching correction information” corresponding to the “prefetching category” based on the pending fluctuation time is acquired with reference to FIG. In this case, the prefetch categories 3000, 7500, and 12500 are all put on hold where the effect of “out” is executed, and “1 (overwrite allowed)” is set as the value of the prefetch correction information when the prefetch is not won. It is associated.

  The prefetch categories 91000, 140000, and 200000 are all put on hold in which the effect of “out of” is executed, and the value of the prefetch correction information when prefetching is not won is “0 (overwrite prohibited)”. "Is associated.

  In addition, the prefetch categories 97000, 146000, 206000, and 294000 are all put on hold in which the effect of “winning (eg, super reach)” is executed, and the value of the prefetch correction information when the prefetching is not won is excluded. “0 (overwrite prohibited)” is associated with each.

  In the case of “Echigoya search mode”, reference is made to FIG. In this case, the pre-read categories 1500 and 3000 are all put on hold with the effect of “out of” being executed, and the pre-read correction information value when the pre-read win is not selected is “1 (overwrite allowed)”. Are associated.

  In addition, the prefetch categories 7500, 19000, 22000, and 23500 are all put on hold where the effect of “out of” is executed, and the prefetch correction information values when the prefetch win is not selected are “0 (overwrite)”. Forbidden) ”.

  In addition, the prefetch categories 33500, 36000, 42500, and 52000 are all put on hold in which the effect of “winning (for example, super reach)” is executed, and the values of the prefetch correction information when the prefetching is not won are excluded. “0 (overwrite prohibited)” is associated with each.

  In the “training mode”, reference is made to FIG. In this case, the pre-read categories 1500 and 3000 are all put on hold with the effect of “out of” being executed, and the pre-read correction information value when the pre-read win is not selected is “1 (overwrite allowed)”. Are associated.

  In addition, when the pre-read category is 7500, the effect of “out of” is put on hold, and the value of the pre-read correction information when the pre-read win is not selected corresponds to “2 (can be overwritten under certain conditions)”. It is attached. Here, when the presentation mode is “training mode” and the prefetch category is 7500, “2” is associated as the value of the prefetch correction information even when the prefetch win is selected. That is, in this example, “2” is set as the correction information when “the production mode is“ training mode ”and the prefetch category is 7500”. Except for this case, “prefetch correction when the prefetch win is not won” is set. The “information value” is all “0”.

  The prefetch categories 95000, 99500, 109000, and 134000 are all put on hold for the effect of “out of”, and the value of the prefetch correction information when the prefetch win is not selected is “0 (overwrite)”. Forbidden) ”.

  In addition, the prefetch categories 97000, 101500, 110000, and 136000 are all put on hold in which the effect of “winning (for example, super reach)” is executed, and the values of the prefetch correction information when the prefetching is not won are excluded. “0 (overwrite prohibited)” is associated with each.

  43 to 48 show an example of information set in the prefetch lottery information table provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 (left figure) and an example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in that case ( FIG. FIGS. 43 and 44 are setting examples and display examples of conventional prefetch lottery information, and FIGS. 45 to 48 are setting examples and display examples of prefetch lottery information in the present embodiment.

  43 to 48, the pre-read lottery information table shown in the left diagram of FIG. 43 includes information on the fluctuation in the special figure 2 (displayed as “related” in the item “special figure 2” in the table) and the hold 1 in the special figure 2. To 4 (displayed as “hold 1” to “hold 4” in the table item “special drawing 2”) are stored. Information on “lottery information”, “correction information”, and “hold color information” is stored in each of “related” and “hold 1” to “hold 4”. “Lottery information” is information related to the execution of the pre-reading effect. When the lottery information is “None”, it indicates that the pre-reading effect is not executed. Represents. In addition, for example, when the lottery information is “changing eye”, it means that the chance eye notice is executed for the prefetching notice target with “the relevant” or “hold” ahead of the prefetching notice object. When the information is “Ripples (Ripple related)”, it indicates that the Ripple Notice is executed as a background display for the target of the pre-reading notice with “Present” or “Pending” of the target of the pre-reading notice. . “Correction information” is information indicating whether or not to permit overwriting processing of “lottery information” based on the latest information sent from the main control unit 300. When the correction information is “0”, This indicates that rewriting of “lottery information” is not permitted (overwriting prohibited). Further, when the correction information is “1”, it means that it is permitted to rewrite (overwrite) the “lottery information” in order to execute a pre-reading notice regarding the hold added later. Further, when the correction information is “2”, it indicates that it is permitted to rewrite (overwrite) “lottery information” with conditions (in the case of special conditions). “Hold color information” represents the color of a hold icon to be prefetched. The “hold color information” is further divided into items of “previous”, “current”, “next”, “next time”, and “next time”, and the color information of the hold icon is stored for each item. It is like that.

  The right figure of FIG. 43 (a) shows, for example, that the probability change electric power support state in which the probability change and the short time are operated up to 150 times of the special figure change frequency (the electric power support frequency is 150 times) is started after the big hit game ends, and the remaining electric power support times Shows a state in which 30 special figure 2 variable games are started. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variation game, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and various jackpot flags, outlier flags, and special figure probabilities included in the symbol variation start command. Based on the information indicating the value of the fluctuation flag, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, etc., the fluctuation time (timer value) of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the special figure related lottery process, for example, the special figure fluctuation shown in FIGS. A predetermined effect is executed with reference to the pattern lottery table. As a result, at this timing, in the special figure 2 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the remaining number of electric supporters (here, “remaining 30”). Times)) is also displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the fluctuation icon CI of the fluctuation is displayed, and in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, the hold icons PI1 and PI2 are displayed, and the remaining hold in the special figure 2 is two. We are informing you.

  Prior to the start of the special figure variable game, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, and the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2 included in the prefetch result information command. , Big hit type (big hit 1 (big hit for both low accuracy and high accuracy), big hit 2 (big hit only at high accuracy) or off), prefetch number stored in prefetch number storage area, symbol type related to prefetch result ( The prefetch lottery information table is updated based on the information indicating the stop symbol), the timer value (variation time), and the prefetch correction information acquisition table shown in FIG.

  The left figure of Fig.43 (a) has shown the updated prefetch lottery information table. In the item “special drawing 2” in the table, the “lot” information is set to “none”, and the correction information is set to “1 (overwrite possible)”. In addition, “default” is set in the “previous” of the hold color information, and the start information related to the current special figure variable game is the hold 1 with the hold color “default” in the previous special figure variable game Is shown. As for “hold 1” of the item “special drawing 2” in the table, the lottery information is set to “none” and the correction information is set to “1”. In addition, “default” is set for “previous” and “current” of the hold information, the hold color of hold 1 in the current special figure variable game is “default”, and in the previous special figure variable game This indicates that the hold color is “default” hold 2. In the “hold 2” of the item “special drawing 2” in the table, the lottery information is set to “none” and the correction information is set to “1”. In addition, “default” is set for “previous”, “current”, and “next” of the hold information, the hold color of hold 2 in the current special figure variable game is “default”, and the previous special In the figure variation game, the hold color is “default” hold 3, and in the next special figure variable game, the hold color is “default” hold 1.

  The first sub-control unit 400 uses a white square variation icon CI whose display mode is “default” in the variation icon display area 800 based on information set to “related” of the item “special drawing 2” in the prefetch lottery information table. Is displayed. Further, based on the information set to “hold 1” of the item “special drawing 2” in the prefetch lottery information table, the display mode is “default” on the side close to the variable icon display area 800 of the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902. The holding icon PI1 of the special figure 2 of white square is displayed. Further, based on the information set to “hold 2” of the item “special drawing 2” in the pre-read lottery information table, the display mode is “default” white on the left side of the hold icon PI1 in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902. The hold icon PI2 of the square special figure 2 is displayed.

  FIG. 43 (b) shows a state in which a game ball has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 and there are three suspensions in the special figure 2. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, and the prefetch stored in the type, jackpot type, and prefetch number storage areas of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 included in the prefetch result information command. The prefetch lottery information table is updated based on the information indicating the number, the symbol type (stop symbol) stored in the prefetch result storage unit, the timer value, and the prefetch correction information acquisition table shown in FIG.

  At this timing, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 5B, the first sub-control unit 400 calculates the number of prefetches included in the prefetching result information command and the number of pending information stored in the current prefetching lottery information table. In comparison, it is determined that the hold in the special figure 2 is increased by one, and information is described in “hold 3” in the prefetch lottery information table. In addition, based on the stop symbol of “hold 3”, the lottery information is set to “related” for “hold 3”, and the hold color 3 is “blue” in the special figure variable game whose hold color information is “current”. Information that the hold color is “blue” hold 2 in the “next time” special figure variation game, and that the hold color is “green” hold 1 in the “next time” special figure change game. Store. “Corresponding” in the lottery information of “hold 3” indicates that the hold 3 is the target of the prefetch notice. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 changes the lottery information of “hold 1” and “hold 2” to “changing item”. By changing the lottery information of “hold 1” and “hold 2” to “changing”, a combination of out-of-place decorative symbols to be notified in the special figure variable game for the hold (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 2— The decoration 3 ") is displayed in a swinging manner so that a notice is given that the" hold 3 "is a big hit (a chance eye notice is executed). In addition, the correction information for “Hold 1”, “Hold 2”, and “Hold 3” is set to “0 (overwrite prohibited) so that the lottery information for“ Hold 1 ”,“ Hold 2 ”, and“ Hold 3 ”is not changed. ) ”.

  Based on the information set in “hold 3” of the item “special map 2” in the prefetch lottery information table, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the special map 2 hold icon as shown in the right diagram of FIG. The hold icon PI3 of FIG. 2 is displayed to the left of the two hold icons PI1 and PI2 displayed in the area 902. The display mode of the hold icon PI3 is “blue”. Thus, based on the pre-read lottery information table, the display mode of the hold icon PI displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the change icon CI displayed in the change icon display area 800 are displayed. A display mode is determined.

  FIG. 43 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are stopped and the second special figure display device 214 is stopped. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game ((a) in the same figure), the main control unit 300 makes a success / failure determination using the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. decide. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18B, “special figure b” is selected. As a result of this processing, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 43 (c), “decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, It is notified that the result of the variable game is out of place (special figure b). Also, the hold icon PI3 of the special figure 2 whose display mode is “blue” is displayed to the left of the two hold icons PI1 and PI2 displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902. At this timing, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 43C, the items in the prefetch lottery information table are the same as in the state of FIG.

  FIG. 43 (d) shows a state in which one hold of FIG. 2 has been consumed and two holds have been made, and the decorative game display device 208 has started the variable game of FIG. 2. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variation game, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and various jackpot flags, outlier flags, and special figure probabilities included in the symbol variation start command. Based on the information indicating the value of the fluctuation flag, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, etc., the fluctuation time (timer value) of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the special figure related lottery process, for example, the special figure fluctuation shown in FIGS. A predetermined effect is executed with reference to the pattern lottery table. As a result of this processing, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 43 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, the remaining number of times of electricity support (here, “29 remaining times”) is also displayed.

  In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, it overwrites the “holding 1” information of the item of the special drawing 2 in the pre-read lottery information table with “the relevant”, and sequentially The process of overwriting the information of “hold 2” with “hold 1”, overwriting the information of “hold 3” with “hold 2”, and erasing the information of “hold 3” is executed.

  Based on the information set in the look-ahead lottery information table, the first sub-control unit 400 has one hold icon PI1 in the default form in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 and a hold icon PI2 in which the display form is “blue”. Is displayed. Further, the variation icon CI of the default mode is displayed in the variation icon display area 800.

  FIG. 43 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped (temporary stop display, shaking fluctuation display) and the second special figure display device 214 is changing. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game ((d) in the same figure), the main control unit 300 makes a success / failure determination using the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. decide. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18B, “special figure b” is selected. As a result of this processing, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 43 (e), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 have “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3”, which is a combination of out-of-place ornament symbols. Is displayed in a swinging manner, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place (special figure b). Note that the fluctuation display of “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” and the effect display behind it, which is a combination of the decorative patterns of the off-set here, are the items of “hold 1” or “related” in the prefetch lottery information table. Based on the information, this is a chance eye notice that “hold 2” is a big hit.

  Further, the hold icon PI2 of the special figure 2 whose display mode is “blue” is displayed to the left of the one hold icon PI1 displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, and the default icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 800. A change icon CI is displayed. At this timing, the items in the pre-read lottery information table are the same as in the state of FIG. 43D, as shown in the left diagram of FIG.

  FIG. 44 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 2 hold is digested to become one hold, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable game of the special figure 2. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variation game, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and various jackpot flags, outlier flags, and special figure probabilities included in the symbol variation start command. Based on the information indicating the value of the fluctuation flag, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, etc., the fluctuation time (timer value) of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the special figure related lottery process, for example, the special figure fluctuation shown in FIGS. A predetermined effect is executed with reference to the pattern lottery table. As a result of this processing, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 44 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, the remaining number of times of power support (here, “remaining 28 times”) is also displayed.

  In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, it overwrites the “holding 1” information of the item of the special drawing 2 in the pre-read lottery information table with “the relevant”, and sequentially A process of overwriting “hold 2” information on “hold 1” and erasing the information of “hold 2” is executed.

  The first sub-control unit 400 displays the hold icon PI1 whose display mode is “green” in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 based on the information set in the prefetch lottery information table. Further, the variation icon CI of the default mode is displayed in the variation icon display area 800.

  FIG. 44 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped (temporary stop display, shaking fluctuation display), and the second special figure display device 214 is changing. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game (figure (f)), the main control unit 300 makes a success / failure determination using the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. decide. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18B, “special figure b” is selected. As a result of this processing, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 44 (g), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 have “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4”, which is a combination of disparate ornament symbols. Is displayed in a swinging manner, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place (special figure b). Note that the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” and the effect display behind it, which is a combination of out-of-place decoration symbols, is based on the information of the item “related” in the prefetch lottery information table. This is a chance eye notice that “hold 1” is a big hit.

  In addition, one hold icon PI1 whose display form is “green” is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, and the change icon CI of the default form is displayed in the change icon display area 800. At this timing, the items in the pre-read lottery information table are the same as the state of FIG.

  FIG. 44 (h) shows a state in which one hold of the special figure 2 is consumed and the number of the hold becomes zero and the variable game of the special figure 2 is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variation game, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and various jackpot flags, outlier flags, and special figure probabilities included in the symbol variation start command. Based on the information indicating the value of the fluctuation flag, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, etc., the fluctuation time (timer value) of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the special figure related lottery process, for example, the special figure fluctuation shown in FIGS. A predetermined effect is executed with reference to the pattern lottery table. As a result of this process, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 44 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 overwrites the “hold” information of “pending 1” in the special drawing 2 item of the prefetch lottery information table with “hold”. 1 ”is deleted.

  Based on the information set in the prefetch lottery information table, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the fluctuation icon CI whose display mode is “green” in the fluctuation icon display area 800, and holds the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 on hold. Erase the icon.

  Next, a setting example of the prefetch lottery information in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the pre-read lottery information set with an increase in the hold can be overwritten when the pre-read lottery information changing condition is satisfied (in the case of a special condition).

  First, FIGS. 45 to 46 show setting examples and display examples of prefetch lottery information when the prefetch lottery information change condition is satisfied (in the case of special conditions). Here, as a condition for changing the prefetch lottery information, the hold is a prefetch target (winning the prefetch lottery), and information that can be overwritten conditionally on the correction information in the prefetch lottery information table (correction) A case will be described as an example in which all of the fact that information = "2") is set and that the hold is further increased within the same fluctuation in which the hold is increased.

  The right figure of FIG. 45 (a) shows, for example, the probability change electric power support state in which the probability change and the short time are operated up to 150 times of the special figure change number (the electric support number is 150 times) after the end of the big hit game, and the remaining electric support number of times. Shows a state in which 30 special figure 2 variable games are started. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variation game, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and various jackpot flags, outlier flags, and special figure probabilities included in the symbol variation start command. Based on the information indicating the value of the fluctuation flag, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, etc., the fluctuation time (timer value) of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the special figure related lottery process, for example, the special figure fluctuation shown in FIGS. A predetermined effect is executed with reference to the pattern lottery table. As a result, in the special symbol 2 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and also the remaining number of electric support (here, “30 times remaining”). Is displayed.

  In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the fluctuation icon CI of the fluctuation is displayed, and in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, the hold icons PI1 and PI2 are displayed, and the remaining hold in the special figure 2 is two. We are informing you.

  Prior to the start of the special figure variable game, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, and the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2 included in the prefetch result information command. , Big hit type (big hit 1 (big hit for both low accuracy and high accuracy), big hit 2 (big hit only at high accuracy) or off), prefetch number stored in prefetch number storage area, symbol type related to prefetch result ( The prefetch lottery information table is updated based on the information indicating the stop symbol), the timer value (variation time), and the prefetch correction information acquisition table shown in FIG.

  The left figure of Fig.45 (a) has shown the updated prefetch lottery information table. For the item “special drawing 2” in the table, the lottery information is set to “none” and the correction information is set to “1”. In addition, “default” is set in the “previous” of the hold color information, and the start information related to the current special figure variable game is the hold 1 with the hold color “default” in the previous special figure variable game Is shown. As for “hold 1” of the item “special drawing 2” in the table, the lottery information is set to “none” and the correction information is set to “1”. In addition, “default” is set for “previous” and “current” of the hold information, the hold color of hold 1 in the current special figure variable game is “default”, and in the previous special figure variable game This indicates that the hold color is “default” hold 2. In the “hold 2” of the item “special drawing 2” in the table, the lottery information is set to “none” and the correction information is set to “1”. In addition, “default” is set for “previous”, “current”, and “next” of the hold information, the hold color of hold 2 in the current special figure variable game is “default”, and the previous special In the figure variation game, the hold color is “default” hold 3, and in the next special figure variable game, the hold color is “default” hold 1.

  The first sub-control unit 400 uses a white square variation icon CI whose display mode is “default” in the variation icon display area 800 based on information set to “related” of the item “special drawing 2” in the prefetch lottery information table. Is displayed. Further, based on the information set to “hold 1” of the item “special drawing 2” in the prefetch lottery information table, the display mode is “default” on the side close to the variable icon display area 800 of the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902. The holding icon PI1 of the special figure 2 of white square is displayed. Further, based on the information set to “hold 2” of the item “special drawing 2” in the pre-read lottery information table, the display mode is “default” white on the left side of the hold icon PI1 in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902. The hold icon PI2 of the square special figure 2 is displayed.

  FIG. 45 (b) shows a state in which a game ball has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 and there are three suspensions in the special figure 2. FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, and the prefetch stored in the type, jackpot type, and prefetch number storage areas of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 included in the prefetch result information command. The prefetch lottery information table is updated based on the information indicating the number, the symbol type (stop symbol) stored in the prefetch result storage unit, the timer value, and the prefetch correction information acquisition table shown in FIG.

  At this timing, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 5B, the first sub-control unit 400 calculates the number of prefetches included in the prefetching result information command and the number of pending information stored in the current prefetching lottery information table. In comparison, it is determined that the hold in the special figure 2 is increased by one, and information is described in “hold 3” in the prefetch lottery information table. Also, based on the stop symbol of “hold 3”, the lottery information for “hold 3” is set to “changing relevant”, and the hold color information is “default” in the special figure variation game of “this time”. Hold 3 for the “next” special figure variation game, and the hold color 2 becomes “default” for the “next” special game. Is stored. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 changes the lottery information of “hold 1” and “hold 2” to “changing item”. By changing the lottery information for "Hold 1" and "Hold 2" to "Chang", and setting the lottery information for "Hold 3" to "Chang", this will be notified in a special figure variable game about that hold The combination of out-of-place decorative symbols is displayed in a swinging manner to notify that “hold 3” is a big hit (notice the chance eye). Further, the setting of “1” is maintained for the “hold 1”, “hold 2”, and “related” lottery information, and the increased correction information of “hold 3” indicates the effect mode (“training mode”) at this timing. ) And the value (7500) of the variation time (prefetch category), “2” is set in order to permit overwriting with a condition based on the prefetch correction information acquisition table shown in FIG.

  Based on the information set in “hold 3” of the item “special map 2” in the prefetch lottery information table, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the special map 2 hold icon as shown in the right diagram of FIG. The hold icon PI3 of FIG. 2 is displayed to the left of the two hold icons PI1 and PI2 displayed in the area 902. The hold icons PI1 to PI3 are default display modes. Further, the fluctuation icon CI is displayed in the default display form in the fluctuation icon display area 800.

  FIG. 45 (c) shows a state in which a game ball has further entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 and there are four suspensions in the special figure 2 within the same variation as in FIG. 45 (b). The first sub-control unit 400 receives the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, and the prefetch stored in the type, jackpot type, and prefetch number storage areas of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 included in the prefetch result information command. The prefetch lottery information table is updated based on information indicating the number, the symbol type (stop symbol), the timer value, etc. stored in the prefetch result storage unit.

  At this timing, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 9C, the first sub-control unit 400 calculates the number of prefetches included in the prefetching result information command and the number of pending information stored in the current prefetching lottery information table. In comparison, it is determined that the number of hold in Special Figure 2 has increased by one, and information is described in “hold 4” in the prefetch lottery information table. In addition, based on the stop symbol of “hold 4”, the lottery information is set to “ripple concerned” for “hold 4”, and the hold color is “blue” in “this time” special figure variation game. In the “next time” special figure variation game, the hold color is “green” hold 3; in the “next time” special figure variable game, the hold color is “green” hold 2; In the special figure variation game of "", information indicating that the hold color is "Red" 1 is stored. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 changes (overwrites) all the lottery information of “hold 1” to “hold 3” to “ripple”. By changing the lottery information of “hold 1” to “hold 3” to “ripple” and setting the lottery information of “hold 4” to “ripple relevant” The effect of displaying the ripples in the background display (of the fluctuation display) is performed to notify that “Hold 4” is a big hit (run the ripple notice). The ripple notice is stronger than the chance notice (indicating an advantageous jackpot). Further, the correction information of “hold 1” to “hold 4” is set to “0” in order to prohibit overwriting. Further, “1” is maintained as the correction information of “related”.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a predetermined change condition is satisfied (for example, when the hold is a prefetch target (winning the prefetch lottery)), the correction information in the prefetch lottery information table can be overwritten with conditions. When the information (correction information = “2”) is set and the holding is further increased within the same fluctuation in which the holding is increased, the lottery information of the previous holding is overwritten with the lottery information of the holding that has been increased. .

  In this way, for example, when the increased reserved lottery information (prefetch notice information) is more advantageous than the previous reserved lottery information, the increased reserved lottery information (strong prefetch notice) ) Can be used to overwrite the previous lottery information (weak prefetch notice). Accordingly, there may be a case where a variation can be given to the prefetch notice to be executed.

  In addition, the pre-reading notice information (lottery information) regarding “hold 3 (first hold)” increased in FIG. 10B is not determined during the fluctuation in which “hold 3” has increased, ) When “hold 4 (second hold)” to be prefetched increases during the same fluctuation as shown in FIG.

  By doing in this way, a series of effects (for example, a hot look-ahead notice effect) based on the look-ahead effect information about the hold ("hold 4") that was won later can be executed. There is a case where the production effect can be improved by preventing the production from being interrupted without mixing strong prefetching productions such as the notice production and the ripple notice.

  Based on the information set in “hold 3” of the item “special map 2” in the prefetch lottery information table, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the special map 2 hold icon as shown in the right diagram of FIG. The hold icon PI3 of FIG. 2 is displayed to the left of the two hold icons PI1 and PI2 displayed in the area 902. The hold icons PI1 to PI3 are default display modes. Further, the fluctuation icon CI is displayed in the default display form in the fluctuation icon display area 800.

  FIG. 45 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and the second special figure display device 214 is stopped. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game ((a) in the same figure), the main control unit 300 makes a success / failure determination using the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. decide. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18B, “special figure b” is selected. As a result of this processing, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 45 (d), “decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208. It is notified that the result of the variable game is out of place (special figure b). Further, the hold icon PI4 of the special figure 2 whose display mode is “blue” is displayed to the left of the three hold icons PI1, PI2, and PI3 displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902. At this timing, the items in the prefetch lottery information table are the same as in the state of FIG. 45C as shown in the left diagram of FIG.

  FIG. 45 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 2 hold is digested and the number of the hold becomes 3, and the decorative game display device 208 starts the variable game of the special figure 2. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variation game, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and various jackpot flags, outlier flags, and special figure probabilities included in the symbol variation start command. Based on the information indicating the value of the fluctuation flag, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, etc., the fluctuation time (timer value) of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the special figure related lottery process, for example, the special figure fluctuation shown in FIGS. A predetermined effect is executed with reference to the pattern lottery table. As a result of this processing, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 43 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, the remaining number of times of electricity support (here, “29 remaining times”) is also displayed.

  In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, it overwrites the “holding 1” information of the item of the special drawing 2 in the pre-read lottery information table with “the relevant”, and sequentially "Hold 2" information is overwritten with "Hold 1", "Hold 3" information is overwritten with "Hold 2", "Hold 4" information is overwritten with "Hold 3", "Hold 4" Execute processing to erase information.

  Based on the information set in the look-ahead lottery information table, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect of displaying ripples in the background display (of the decorative symbol variation display) in the special figure variation game, and the chance eye preview Instead of this, a notice is made that “hold 3” is a big hit (a ripple notice is executed). Also, in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, two hold icons PI1 and PI2 having a default form and a hold icon PI3 having a display form of “green” are displayed. Further, the variation icon CI of the default mode is displayed in the variation icon display area 800.

  FIG. 46 (f) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped (temporary stop display, shaking fluctuation display) and the second special figure display device 214 is changing. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game (FIG. 45 (e)), the main control unit 300 makes a success / failure determination using the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. decide. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18B, “special figure b” is selected. As a result of this processing, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 46 (f), in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3—decoration 1—decoration 4”, which is a combination of disparate ornament symbols. Is displayed in a swinging manner, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place (special figure b).

  Further, the hold icon PI3 of the special figure 2 whose display mode is “green” is displayed to the left of the two hold icons PI1 and PI2 displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, and the default is displayed in the variable icon display area 800. A variation icon CI of the aspect is displayed. At this timing, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 46F, the items in the prefetch lottery information table are the same as the state of FIG.

  In FIG. 46 (g), two reservations are digested from the state of FIG. 46 (f), the remaining number of electric support is 27 times, for example, the decorative symbol is stopped (temporary stop display, shaking fluctuation display), and The state where the 2nd special figure display device 214 is fluctuating is shown. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the main control unit 300 makes a success / failure determination using the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 17 and determines that the result of the special figure variable game is out of sync. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18B, “special figure b” is selected. As a result of this processing, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 46 (g), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 6—decoration 7”, which is a combination of disparate ornament symbols. Is displayed in a swinging manner, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place (special figure b).

  In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, it overwrites the “holding 1” information of the item of the special drawing 2 in the pre-read lottery information table with “the relevant”, and sequentially A process of overwriting “hold 2” information on “hold 1” and erasing the information of “hold 2” is executed.

  In addition, the hold icon PI1 of the special figure 2 whose display mode is “red” is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, and the change icon CI of the default form is displayed in the change icon display area 800.

  FIG. 46 (h) shows a state in which one hold of FIG. 2 has been consumed and there are 0 holds, and the decorative game display device 208 has started the variable game of FIG. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variation game, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and various jackpot flags, outlier flags, and special figure probabilities included in the symbol variation start command. Based on the information indicating the value of the fluctuation flag, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, etc., the fluctuation time (timer value) of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the special figure related lottery process, for example, the special figure fluctuation shown in FIGS. A predetermined effect is executed with reference to the pattern lottery table. As a result of this processing, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 43 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 overwrites the “hold” information of “pending 1” in the special drawing 2 item of the prefetch lottery information table with “hold”. 1 ”is deleted.

  Based on the information set in the look-ahead lottery information table, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect of displaying ripples in the background display (of the decorative symbol variation display) in the special figure variation game, and the suspension is performed. A notice of a big hit is given (a ripple notice is executed). Further, the hold icon PI in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 is deleted, and the change icon CI whose display mode is “red” is displayed in the change icon display area 800. In this example, the ripple notice is executed over the period of FIGS. 45 (e) to 46 (f).

  The period in which the lottery information in the pre-read lottery information table is “2 (can be overwritten with conditions)” is a limited period after the lottery information changing condition is satisfied (FIG. 45B).

  Next, FIGS. 47 to 48 show setting examples and display examples of the prefetch lottery information when the change condition of the prefetch lottery information is not satisfied. Here, as an example of the case where the change condition of the prefetch lottery information is not satisfied, for example, the case where the production mode is the “training mode” and the suspension does not increase during the period where the variation time is 7500 ms. explain.

  The right figure of FIG. 47 (a) shows, for example, a probability change electric power support state in which the probability change and the time reduction after the big hit game are finished is activated up to 150 times of the special figure change frequency (the electric support frequency is 150 times), and the remaining electric support frequency. Shows a state in which 30 special figure 2 variable games are started. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variation game, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and various jackpot flags, outlier flags, and special figure probabilities included in the symbol variation start command. Based on the information indicating the value of the fluctuation flag, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, etc., the fluctuation time (timer value) of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the special figure related lottery process, for example, the special figure fluctuation shown in FIGS. A predetermined effect is executed with reference to the pattern lottery table. As a result, in the special symbol 2 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and also the remaining number of electric support (here, “30 times remaining”). Is displayed.

  In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the fluctuation icon CI of the fluctuation is displayed, and in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, the hold icons PI1 and PI2 are displayed, and the remaining hold in the special figure 2 is two. We are reporting.

  Prior to the start of the special figure variable game, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, and the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2 included in the prefetch result information command. , Big hit type (big hit 1 (big hit for both low accuracy and high accuracy), big hit 2 (big hit only at high accuracy) or off), prefetch number stored in prefetch number storage area, symbol type related to prefetch result ( The prefetch lottery information table is updated based on the information indicating the stop symbol), the timer value (variation time), and the prefetch correction information acquisition table shown in FIG.

  The left figure of FIG. 47A shows the updated prefetch lottery information table. For the item “special drawing 2” in the table, the lottery information is set to “none” and the correction information is set to “1”. In addition, “default” is set in the “previous” of the hold color information, and the start information related to the current special figure variable game is the hold 1 with the hold color “default” in the previous special figure variable game Is shown. As for “hold 1” of the item “special drawing 2” in the table, the lottery information is set to “none” and the correction information is set to “1”. In addition, “default” is set for “previous” and “current” of the hold information, the hold color of hold 1 in the current special figure variable game is “default”, and in the previous special figure variable game This indicates that the hold color is “default” hold 2. In the “hold 2” of the item “special drawing 2” in the table, the lottery information is set to “none” and the correction information is set to “1”. In addition, “default” is set for “previous”, “current”, and “next” of the hold information, the hold color of hold 2 in the current special figure variable game is “default”, and the previous special In the figure variation game, the hold color is “default” hold 3, and in the next special figure variable game, the hold color is “default” hold 1.

  The first sub-control unit 400 uses a white square variation icon CI whose display mode is “default” in the variation icon display area 800 based on information set to “related” of the item “special drawing 2” in the prefetch lottery information table. Is displayed. Further, based on the information set to “hold 1” of the item “special drawing 2” in the prefetch lottery information table, the display mode is “default” on the side close to the variable icon display area 800 of the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902. The holding icon PI1 of the special figure 2 of white square is displayed. Further, based on the information set to “hold 2” of the item “special drawing 2” in the pre-read lottery information table, the display mode is “default” white on the left side of the hold icon PI1 in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902. The hold icon PI2 of the square special figure 2 is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (b) shows a state in which a game ball has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 and there are three suspensions in the special figure 2. FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, and the prefetch stored in the type, jackpot type, and prefetch number storage areas of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 included in the prefetch result information command. The prefetch lottery information table is updated based on the information indicating the number, the symbol type (stop symbol) stored in the prefetch result storage unit, the timer value, and the prefetch correction information acquisition table shown in FIG.

  At this timing, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 5B, the first sub-control unit 400 calculates the number of prefetches included in the prefetching result information command and the number of pending information stored in the current prefetching lottery information table. In comparison, it is determined that the hold in the special figure 2 is increased by one, and information is described in “hold 3” in the prefetch lottery information table. Also, based on the stop symbol of “hold 3”, the lottery information for “hold 3” is set to “changing relevant”, and the hold color information is “default” in the special figure variation game of “this time”. Hold 3 for the “next” special figure variation game, and the hold color 2 becomes “default” for the “next” special game. Is stored. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 changes the lottery information of “hold 1” and “hold 2” to “changing item”. Further, the setting of “1” is maintained for the “hold 1”, “hold 2”, and “related” lottery information, and the increased correction information of “hold 3” indicates the effect mode (“training mode”) at this timing. ) And the value (7500) of the variation time (prefetch category), “2” is set in order to permit overwriting with a condition based on the prefetch correction information acquisition table shown in FIG.

  Based on the information set in “hold 3” of the item “special map 2” in the prefetch lottery information table, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the special map 2 hold icon as shown in the right diagram of FIG. The hold icon PI3 of FIG. 2 is displayed to the left of the two hold icons PI1 and PI2 displayed in the area 902. The hold icons PI1 to PI3 are default display modes. Further, the fluctuation icon CI is displayed in the default display form in the fluctuation icon display area 800.

  FIG. 47C shows a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and the second special figure display device 214 is stopped. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game ((a) in the same figure), the main control unit 300 makes a success / failure determination using the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. decide. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18B, “special figure b” is selected. As a result of this processing, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 47 (c), “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208. It is notified that the result of the variable game is out of place (special figure b). Further, the hold icon PI4 of the special figure 2 whose display mode is “blue” is displayed to the left of the three hold icons PI1, PI2, and PI3 displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902. At this timing, the items in the prefetch lottery information table are the same as in the state of FIG. 45C as shown in the left diagram of FIG.

  FIG. 47 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 2 suspension is digested to two, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable game of the special figure 2. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variation game, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and various jackpot flags, outlier flags, and special figure probabilities included in the symbol variation start command. Based on the information indicating the value of the fluctuation flag, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, etc., the fluctuation time (timer value) of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the special figure related lottery process, for example, the special figure fluctuation shown in FIGS. A predetermined effect is executed with reference to the pattern lottery table. As a result of this processing, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 47 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, the remaining number of times of electricity support (here, “29 remaining times”) is also displayed.

  In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, it overwrites the “holding 1” information of the item of the special drawing 2 in the pre-read lottery information table with “the relevant”, and sequentially The process of overwriting the information of “hold 2” with “hold 1”, overwriting the information of “hold 3” with “hold 2”, and erasing the information of “hold 3” is executed. Further, the correction information of “related”, “hold 1”, and “hold 2” is set to “0” in order to prohibit overwriting.

  As described above, the pre-reading notice information (lottery information) regarding “hold 3 (first hold)” increased in FIG. 10B is “hold 4 (second hold)” that is subject to prefetch during the same change. ”Does not increase, it is not fixed, and the hold of the pre-reading notice target (“ hold 2 ”) at the timing when one hold is digested and the next decorative symbol change display is started ((d) in the same figure) The pre-reading notice (in this example, “Changing”) is confirmed, and “0” is set in the correction information of the hold before the hold of the pre-read notice target, and overwriting is prohibited.

  FIG. 47 (e) shows a state in which a game ball has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 and there are three suspensions in the special figure 2. FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, and the prefetch stored in the type, jackpot type, and prefetch number storage areas of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 included in the prefetch result information command. The prefetch lottery information table is updated based on information indicating the number, the symbol type (stop symbol), the timer value, etc. stored in the prefetch result storage unit.

  At this timing, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 9C, the first sub-control unit 400 calculates the number of prefetches included in the prefetching result information command and the number of pending information stored in the current prefetching lottery information table. In comparison, it is determined that the hold in the special figure 2 is increased by one, and information is described in “hold 3” in the prefetch lottery information table. In addition, based on the stop symbol of “hold 3”, the lottery information is set to “ripple relevant” for “hold 3”, and the hold color is “green” in the “current” special figure variable game. In the “next time” special figure variable game, information indicating that the hold color is “green” is 2 and for the “next time” special figure variable game is that the hold color is “red” is 1 . The first sub-control unit 400 does not change (overwrite) the lottery information because the correction information of “related”, “hold 1”, and “hold 2” is “0”. In other words, “Changing” is maintained as the lottery information for “related” and “hold 1”, and “Changing” is maintained for the lottery information of “holding 2”.

  Based on the information set in the look-ahead lottery information table, the first sub-control unit 400 does not execute the effect of displaying ripples in the background display (decorative display of the decorative pattern) in the special figure variable game. In the hold icon display area 902, two hold icons PI1 and PI2 having a default form and a hold icon PI3 having a display form of “green” are displayed, and a change icon CI having a default form is displayed in the change icon display area 800.

  FIG. 48 (f) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped (temporary stop display, shaking fluctuation display) and the second special figure display device 214 is changing. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game (FIG. 47 (e)), the main control unit 300 makes a success / failure determination using the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. decide. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18B, “special figure b” is selected. As a result of this process, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 48 (f), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 have “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3”, which is a combination of disparate decorative symbols. Is displayed in a swinging manner, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place (special figure b). Note that the fluctuation display of “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” and the effect display behind it, which is a combination of the decorative patterns of the off-set here, are the items of “hold 1” or “related” in the prefetch lottery information table. Based on the information, this is a chance eye notice that “hold 2” is a big hit.

  Further, the hold icon PI3 of the special figure 2 whose display form is “green” is displayed to the left of the two hold icons PI1 and PI2 of the default form displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, and the variable icon display area A variation icon CI of a default mode is displayed at 800. At this timing, the items in the pre-read lottery information table are the same as in the state of FIG. 43D, as shown in the left diagram of FIG.

  FIG. 48 (g) shows that after one hold is digested and the decorative symbol variation display is started, the decorative symbol is stopped (temporary stop display, shaking variation display), and the second special symbol display device 214 is displayed. Indicates a fluctuating state. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the main control unit 300 makes a success / failure determination using the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 17 and determines that the result of the special figure variable game is out of sync. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18B, “special figure b” is selected. As a result of this processing, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 48 (g), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4”, which is a combination of disparate ornament symbols. Is displayed in a swinging manner, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place (special figure b). The fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” and the effect display behind it, which is a combination of out-of-band decoration symbols here, is the item “hold 1” or “related” of the prefetch lottery information table. Based on the information, this is a chance eye notice that “hold 1” is a big hit.

  In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, it overwrites the “holding 1” information of the item of the special drawing 2 in the pre-read lottery information table with “the relevant”, and sequentially A process of overwriting “hold 1” with “hold 1”, overwriting “hold 3” with “hold 2”, and erasing “hold 3” information is executed. “0” is maintained for the correction information of “related”, “hold 1”, and “hold 2”.

  Further, the hold icon PI2 of the special figure 2 whose display form is “green” is displayed to the left of the one hold icon PI1 of the default form displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, and the variable icon display area 800 is displayed. A variation icon CI of the default mode is displayed.

  FIG. 48 (h) shows a state in which one hold of Special Figure 2 is digested to become one hold and the variable game of Special Figure 2 is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variation game, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and various jackpot flags, outlier flags, and special figure probabilities included in the symbol variation start command. Based on the information indicating the value of the fluctuation flag, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, etc., the fluctuation time (timer value) of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the special figure related lottery process, for example, the special figure fluctuation shown in FIGS. A predetermined effect is executed with reference to the pattern lottery table. As a result of this processing, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 47 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, the remaining number of times of electricity support (here, “27 remaining times”) is also displayed.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 overwrites the “hold” information of “pending 1” in the special drawing 2 item of the prefetch lottery information table with “hold”. The information “2” is overwritten on “hold 1”, and the process of deleting the information “hold 2” is executed. The correction information “related” and “hold 1” is maintained at “0” in order to prohibit overwriting. Since the correction information is not overwritten, the ripple notice corresponding to “hold 1” is not executed.

  Further, the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 displays the hold icon PI1 of the special figure 2 whose display mode is “red”, and the change icon display area 800 displays the change icon CI of the default form.

  FIG. 48 (i) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and the second special figure display device 214 is stopped and displayed. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game ((h) in the figure), the main control unit 300 makes a success / failure determination using the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. decide. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18B, “special figure b” is selected. As a result of this processing, as shown in the right figure of FIG. 48 (i), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 6—decoration 7”, which is a combination of disparate ornament symbols. Is stopped, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place (special figure b).

  FIG. 48 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 2 hold is consumed and the number of the hold becomes 0, and the decorative game display device 208 starts the variable game of the special figure 2. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variation game, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and various jackpot flags, outlier flags, and special figure probabilities included in the symbol variation start command. Based on the information indicating the value of the fluctuation flag, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, etc., the fluctuation time (timer value) of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the special figure related lottery process, for example, the special figure fluctuation shown in FIGS. A predetermined effect is executed with reference to the pattern lottery table. As a result of this processing, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 47 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, the remaining number of times of power support (here, “26 remaining times”) is also displayed.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 overwrites the “hold” information of “pending 1” in the special drawing 2 item of the prefetch lottery information table with “hold”. 1 ”is deleted. The “correction” correction information is maintained at “0” to prohibit overwriting.

  Further, the hold icon PI in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 is deleted, and the change icon CI whose display mode is “red” is displayed in the change icon display area 800.

  With reference to FIG. 49 to FIG. 50, an example of updating the information in the prefetch lottery information table of the present embodiment according to increase / decrease of the hold will be further described.

  FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing a state of a pre-reading notice accompanying an increase in holding. As shown in FIG. 6A, information (lottery information and correction information) related to the prefetching notice in the prefetching lottery information table has been conventionally increased to the prefetching notice information of the predecessor (holding 1) (holding 2). The pre-reading notice information for could not be overwritten. For this reason, for example, when weak information (information of prefetching advance notice with low advantage) is set in the predecessor (holding 1), the hot information (information of prefetching notice with low advantage) is subsequently held (hold 2). Even if it increased, it was not possible to overwrite the weak information.

  However, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined change condition is satisfied, the information about the pre-reading advance of the hold (hold 2) can be overwritten on the information about the pre-read pre-run of the pre-hold (hold 1). Thereby, for example, weak information is set in the destination (hold 1), and when the hot information hold (hold 2) increases thereafter, the weak information can be overwritten.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram for further explaining an update example of the prefetch lottery information table of the present embodiment in accordance with increase / decrease of the hold, and shows the lottery information and the correction information for hold 1 to hold 4.

  (A1) in the figure is an update example in the case where two “2 (conditional overwriting is possible)” of the correction information occurs due to the increase in suspension.

  In (a1) and (a) in the figure, the lottery information for “hold 1” is set to “none”, the correction information is set to “1”, the lottery information for “hold 2” is set to “none”, The correction information is set to “2”.

  (A1) and (a) in the figure are cases in which the number of holds is increased by one, the lottery information is set to “none” and the correction information is set to “2” for the increased “hold 3”. In this case, the correction information of “hold 1” is overwritten with “0”, and the correction information of “hold 2” is overwritten with “0”. When the correction information of the “hold 3” that has won the prize is “2” and there are a plurality (two) of correction information with the correction information “2”, the correction information of the previous hold (here “hold 2”) “2” is overwritten with “0”. In that case, the correction information “1” of “hold 1” prior to “hold 2” is also overwritten with “0” (steps S1909 to S1911 in FIG. 40B).

  (A2) in the figure shows another update example in the case where two “2 (conditional overwriting is possible)” of the correction information occurs with the increase in the hold.

  In (a2) and (a) in the figure, the lottery information for “hold 1” is set to “none”, the correction information is set to “1”, the lottery information for “hold 2” is set to “none”, The correction information is set to “2”, the lottery information of “hold 3” is set to “none”, and the correction information is set to “1”.

  (A2) (a) in the figure shows a case where the hold is increased by one, the lottery information is set to “none” and the correction information is set to “2” for the increased “hold 4”. In this case, the correction information of “hold 1” is overwritten with “0” and the correction information of “hold 2” is overwritten with “0”, but “hold 3” is not updated. Since the correction information of the “hold 4” that has won the prize is “2”, among the previous holds (“hold 1” to “hold 3”), “2” is set as correction information (here) Then, the correction information of all reservations (“hold 1” and “hold 2”) before “hold 2” is overwritten with “0” (steps S1909 to S1911 in FIG. 40B).

  In this way, when there are a plurality of correction information “2” s due to an increase in the hold in the pre-read lottery information table, the previously set correction information is “2” (see “a” in FIG. The correction information is changed to “0” for all the holds before “hold 2” and “hold 2” in FIG.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of an update when the lottery information is “None” (no pre-reading notice is held) and the correction information is “0”.

  In (b) and (a) in the same drawing, the lottery information for “hold 1” is set to “none”, the correction information is set to “1”, the lottery information for “hold 2” is set to “none”, The correction information is set to “2”.

  (B) and (b) in the case where the holding is increased by one, the lottery information is set to “none” and the correction information is set to “1” for the increased “hold 3”. In this case, since the correction information of “hold 3” is “1”, information on “hold 1” and “hold 2” is not updated.

  (B) and (c) in the case where one hold is consumed, the information of “hold 2” is overwritten with “hold 1”, and the information of “hold 3” is overwritten with “hold 2”. , The information of “hold 3” is deleted.

  FIGS. 4B and 4D show a case where the number of suspensions for executing prefetching A is increased by one. In this case, with respect to the increased “hold 3”, the lottery information is set to “prefetch A relevant” and the correction information is set to “0”. Further, the lottery information is overwritten with “prefetch A” and the correction information is overwritten with “0” for “hold 1” with correction information “1”. In addition, here, the change condition of the prefetch lottery information table (for example, the production mode is “training mode”, the variation time is 7500 ms, and the winning prize is held), and “lot 2” A ”is overwritten, and the correction information is overwritten with“ 0 ”.

  FIG. 11C1 shows an example of updating when the number of holds to be prefetched further increases within the same variation in which the number of holds to be prefetched has increased.

  In (c1) and (a) in the figure, the lottery information of “hold 1” is set to “none”, and the correction information is set to “1”.

  (C1) (b) shows that the pre-read B execution is incremented by one, and for the increased “hold 2”, the lottery information is set to “pre-read B relevant” and the correction information is set to “2”. This is the case. In this case, the lottery information “hold 1” is set to “prefetch B”, and the correction information “1” is maintained.

  (C1) and (c) in FIG. 5B, there is a hold for executing prefetch A (prefetching notice different from prefetch B) within the same fluctuation as the increase in “hold 2 (first hold)” for executing prefetch B. This is a case in which the lottery information is set to “prefetch A concerned” and the correction information is set to “0” for the increased “hold 3 (second hold)”. In this case, the “hold 1” lottery information is overwritten with “prefetch A”, the correction information is overwritten with “0”, and the information is updated. Also, here, the change condition of the prefetch lottery information table (for example, the production mode is “training mode”, the variation time is 7500 ms, and the winning prize is held), and the lottery information is “prefetch A” for “hold 2”. And the correction information is overwritten with “0” to update the information.

  FIG. 10C2 shows an update example in the case where the hold to be prefetched does not increase within the same variation in which the hold to be prefetched has increased.

  In (c2) and (a) in the figure, the lottery information of “hold 1” is set to “none”, and the correction information is set to “1”.

  (C2) (b) shows that the pre-read B execution is incremented by one, and for the increased “hold 2”, the lottery information is set to “pre-read B concerned” and the correction information is set to “2”. This is the case. In this case, the lottery information “hold 1” is set to “prefetch B”, and the correction information “1” is maintained.

  (C2) (c) is a case where one hold is consumed and the next variable game is started. The information of “hold 2” is overwritten with “hold 1” and the information of “hold 2” is changed. Erased. Further, the correction information of “hold 1” is updated to “0”, and it is determined that prefetch B is executed in “hold 1”.

  In the same figure (c2) and (d), within the same variation as (c2) and (c) in the figure, the number of holdings for executing the pre-reading A increased, and for the increased “holding 2”, the lottery information is “pre-reading A concerned” And the correction information is set to “0”. In this case, the lottery information “hold 1” is maintained as “prefetch B”, and the correction information is maintained as “0”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the information (lottery information) of the pre-reading notice for the hold (first hold) for performing the pre-read notice is not determined during the fluctuation in which the first hold is increased, and is the same fluctuation. When the next hold (second hold) to be prefetched increases, the information is updated and confirmed with the information on the prefetch notice of the second hold ((c1) in the figure).

  In addition, the information (lottery information) of the pre-reading notice of the hold (first hold) for performing the pre-read notice is the next hold (second hold) to be pre-read during the same fluctuation in which the first hold has increased. If the number does not increase, the information is not fixed, but the information of the prefetching notice of the first prefetching notice of the first holding is decided at the timing when one hold is digested and the change display of the next decorative symbol is started.

  In this way, if the hold that was won later within the same variation (second hold) is a hold that performs a pre-reading notice, a series of effects (for example, ats A pre-reading notice effect). That is, within the same fluctuation, the first hold (previous hold) for executing a weak (low advantage) prefetch notice effect and the second hold (later for executing a strong (high advantage) prefetch effect) Even if there is a (hold)), there is a case where it is possible to prevent the production from being interrupted and to enhance the production effect without mixing the weak prefetching notice effect and the strong prefetching notice effect.

  FIG. 6D shows an example of updating when the pre-reading effect is not executed and the overwriting prohibition suspension increases.

  In (d) and (a) in the drawing, the lottery information for “hold 1” is set to “none”, the correction information is set to “1”, the lottery information for “hold 2” is set to “none”, The correction information is set to “1”.

  (D) and (b) in the figure are cases in which the number of holds is increased by one, the lottery information is set to “none” and the correction information is set to “0” for the increased “hold 3”. In this case, the correction information of “hold 1” and “hold 2” are both overwritten with “0”.

  <Third Embodiment>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51 to FIG. 85, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail. To do.

  The reference numerals shown in FIG. 51 to FIG. 85 are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even in the case where the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment The reference numerals 51 to 85 are given priority. In addition, although the example of the present embodiment and the number of the modified example are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, each example (modified example) of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments are used. (Modifications) can be applied in combination with each other.

  <Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 51 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is attached to the front side of the main body 104 via a hinge portion 112 so that the inside Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and card unit status, and a cross key 146 that can accept various operations relating to customization, volume / light quantity setting, music selection, and the like. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  <Game board>

  Next, the game board 200 will be described with reference to FIG. 52 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. A decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 124, and a plurality of types of accessory units are disposed around the decorative symbol display device 208. Details of the accessory unit will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this example, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, but it is not necessary to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to display various effects and various game information. Other display devices including a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In addition, a stage 244 is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in an area where the game ball can roll. The stage 244 can temporarily roll a game ball or the like outside the game area 124. Further, a wall 200a3 described later is erected on the rear side of the stage 244, and a game ball that rolls on the stage 244 falls from the stage 244 by colliding with the wall 200a3, and the front side. Guided to the game area 124.

  Although not shown, the game board 200 includes a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The general map display device 210 (not shown) is a display device for displaying a general map, and is constituted by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. A first special figure display device 212 and a second special figure display device 214 (not shown) are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The not-shown universal chart hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending custom figure variable games (details will be described later). In this embodiment, the normal figure variable game has a predetermined number (for example, 2). It is possible to hold up to 2). The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 (not shown) are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the figure variation game. The high-probability medium lamp 222 (not shown) is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high-probability state. Turns on when changing from a probabilistic state to a high probability state, and turns off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

  In addition, the game board 200 has a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, and a first variable. A winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). When a prize is won), the payout device is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the front of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged on the right side of the view. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker, and are arranged at the lower right of the game board 200 as viewed from the front in this embodiment. The first variable winning award port 234 and the second variable winning award port 235 include a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. When the display device stops displaying the jackpot symbol, the door member opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235, the payout device is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is raised as a winning ball. Drain to dish 126. Note that the balls that have entered the first variable prize winning opening 234 and the second variable prize winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called windmills and a plurality of game nails (not shown) are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204 An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, and the like, and the winning opening (the general winning opening 226, the first variable winning opening 234, the second The variable prize opening 235) or the start opening (the first special figure start opening 230, the second special figure start opening 232) is won, or any prize opening or start opening is not won, or the ordinary start opening 228 It reaches the out port 240 only by passing.

  53 (a) is a front view schematically showing the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246, and FIG. 53 (b) is a side along the line AA in FIG. 53 (a). It is sectional drawing.

  The liquid crystal control board case 246 accommodates the above-described liquid crystal control board 246a and a relay board 246b for electrically relaying the liquid crystal control board 246a and another control board. The sub control board case 245 accommodates the above-described sub control board 245a.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (b), when the right side surface of the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 is used as the reference plane, the liquid crystal control board 246a and the sub control board are arranged in order from the reference plane. 245a and the relay board 246b are arranged in this order. In other words, the sub control board 245a is arranged at a position farther from the reference plane than the liquid crystal control board 246a, and is arranged at a position closer to the reference plane than the relay board 246b. It is located between 246a and the relay substrate 246b.

  <Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes. In the present specification, the main control unit 300 may be referred to as “main control unit”, and the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 may be collectively referred to as “sub control unit”.

  <Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and crystal oscillator 316a And a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a random value based on the signal output from the sensor circuit 322. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and a lower plate full sensor. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving and outputting the result of amplification and comparison with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special diagram display device 212 or the second special feature display device. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the universal diagram display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, universal diagrams) A holding lamp 216, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a high-accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) and a driving circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member, for example It connects the drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoids 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a such places blade members 232a and the variable winning hole 234 of the second JP view start hole 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is a one-way communication. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

  <Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times. A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and the volume of the speaker 120. Volume switch 417 for adjusting the position, drive circuit 516 for controlling the driving of the accessory unit 950, various sensors 424 for detecting the current position of the accessory unit 950, and a cross for detecting the operation of the cross key 146. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the key sensor 427 or the chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136 to the basic circuit 402, and a game board lamp drive circuit for controlling the game board lamp 532 530 and game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 It is connected to the road 540, a. In this example, the accessory unit 950 is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. However, the driving unit 950 is configured to be driven and controlled by another control unit (for example, the second sub-control unit 500). Also good.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing.

  The basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, frequency, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 reads out image data stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. A VDP 434 (video display processor) is connected.

  <Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. The payout control unit 600 receives signals output from various sensors 601 including a front frame door opening sensor and an inner frame opening sensor, and is provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. Communication with the card unit 608 is performed.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the dispensing device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  With such a configuration, the control units (main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, and second sub control unit 500) of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment also perform the control processes shown in FIGS. Executed.

  <Functional unit / Center functional unit>

  FIG. 55 is a front view of a center accessory unit 900 which is one of the accessory units.

  The center accessory unit 900 includes a decoration portion 902 disposed on the top of the game board 200 and a light emitting substrate 904 disposed on the back side of the decoration portion 902. The decoration part 902 of this example is arranged around the center part opening 900a with a plurality of first parts 902a radially arranged at predetermined intervals, and arranged inward of the first part 902a. And a second portion 902b that forms the outer edge of the accessory opening 900a.

  A light emitting substrate 714 provided with a plurality of second light emitting units 714a (LEDs in this example) is attached to the front side of the first structure 712b, and by the plurality of second light emitting units 714a, It is possible to output light to the front side of the first structure 712b through cover means 718 disposed in front. A light emitting substrate 716 provided with a plurality of first light emitting means 716a (in this example, LEDs) is attached to the back side of the fourth structure 712a, and the plurality of first light emitting means 716a. Thus, it is possible to output light to the front side of the fourth structure 712a through the fourth structure 712a disposed in front.

  The first part 902a is a part made of a transparent or translucent member capable of transmitting light. In this example, a part of the plurality of first parts 902a is a light emitting substrate 904 of the center accessory 900. Both the light output from the light emitting means (LED in this example) mounted on the light source and the light output from the light emitting means (LED in this example) mounted on the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712b Can be transmitted. On the other hand, the second portion 902b is a portion made of an opaque member that cannot transmit light.

  <Operation of falling unfolding agent>

  Next, operation | movement of the fall expansion | deployment combination 712 is demonstrated using FIG. 56 and FIG. As described above, the falling and unfolding accessory 712 can be moved up and down to slide in the up-and-down direction and rotate to rotate the first structure 712b forward.

  <Dropping and unfolding action / vertical movement>

  FIG. 56 is a view showing the up-and-down operation of the dropping and unfolding combination 712 in the dropping and unfolding combination unit 700 in a state where it is installed on the game board 200.

  FIG. 56 (a) shows a front view and a cross-sectional view in the case where the falling and unfolding accessory 712 is located at the initial position in the up-and-down operation. The initial position in the up-and-down operation is a position where the whole of the falling and unfolding combination 712 overlaps (overlaps) the center combination 900 above the game board 200.

  In this initial position, a part of the decoration (in this example, the character's face) applied to the front surface of the cover means 718 of the falling and unfolding accessory 712 is visible from the front through the center accessory opening 900a of the center accessory 900. The center effect 900 and the falling and unfolding feature 712 provide an integrated performance. The initial position is a position where the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit opening 200a2 does not overlap (does not overlap) the falling and unfolding accessory 712, and the decorative symbol display device from the front. All 208 display areas are visible.

  FIG. 56B shows a front view and a cross-sectional view in the case where the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is located at an intermediate position in the up-and-down operation. When the falling and unfolding accessory 712 is located at the initial position in the up-and-down operation, if the solenoid (not shown) is operated to retract the claw portion 708e out of the through hole 702a, the base 702 is allowed to slide downward. (The lock is released), and the falling and unfolding accessory 712 slides downward by its own weight and reaches the intermediate position.

  The intermediate position in the up-and-down operation is a position where the dropping and unfolding combination 712 at the initial position descends and a part of the dropping and unfolding combination 712 overlaps (overlaps) the center combination 900. In this intermediate position, a part of the decoration applied to the front surface of the cover means 718 of the drop-deployment accessory 712 is visible through the center accessory opening 900a of the center accessory 900. Further, the intermediate position is a position where the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit opening 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) with the falling and unfolding accessory 712, and the decorative symbol display is displayed from the front. Although the upper part of the display area of the device 208 becomes invisible, most of the display area is visible.

  FIG. 56 (c) shows a front view and a cross-sectional view when the falling and unfolding accessory 712 is located at the maximum movement position in the up and down movement. The maximum movement position in the up-and-down operation is a position where the dropping and developing agent 712 at the intermediate position further descends, and a part of the dropping and developing agent 712 does not overlap the center agent 900 (do not overlap). Further, the maximum movement position is a position where the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit opening 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) with the falling and unfolding accessory 712, and is decorative from the front. Most of the display area of the symbol display device 208 becomes invisible.

  <Operation / Rotation operation of falling unfolding agent>

  FIG. 57 is a view showing the rotation operation of the dropping and developing agent 712 by extracting only the dropping and developing agent unit 700.

  FIG. 57 (a) shows a front view when the first structure 712b of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is rotated 45 ° toward the front side in the rotating operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b rotates from 0 ° to 45 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b Two left and right third structures 712c that rotate in directions close to each other as fulcrums and interlock with the rotation of the two left and right second structures 712d approach each other using the fourth structure 712a as a fulcrum. Rotate in the direction.

  Further, when the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side and the engagement between the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and the slider (not shown) is released, the slider is covered. The means 718 is pushed down. For this reason, the cover means 718 slides downward by a predetermined amount and is inclined about 45 ° toward the front, but the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is visible from the front.

  FIG. 57B shows a front view and a cross-sectional view when the first structure 712b of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is rotated 90 ° toward the front side in the rotating operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b is rotated from 45 ° to 90 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b are converted into the first structure 712b. The left and right two third structures 712c that rotate in the direction closer to each other than the state rotated by 45 ° toward the near side and interlock with the rotation of the two right and left second structures 712d are the first The structure 712b rotates in a direction closer to the direction than the state where the structure 712b is rotated 45 ° toward the front side.

  Further, the cover means 718 is inclined by about 90 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is not visible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a ( In this example, the LED) is visible from the front.

  Since the cover means 718 is structured to slide downward by a predetermined amount in conjunction with the rotation of the first structure 712b, the cover means 718 is in a state where the cover means 718 is inclined about 90 ° toward the front. Even if it exists, the protrusion amount to the front side of the cover means 718 can be suppressed to the minimum. As a result, it is possible to avoid the gaming board 200 from becoming unnecessarily thick, and to avoid the situation where the cover means 718 comes into contact with other members.

  FIG. 57 (c) shows a front view when the first structure 712b of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is rotated 135 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b is rotated from 90 ° to 135 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b are replaced with the first structure 712b. The left and right two third structures 712c that rotate in the directions closer to each other than the state rotated by 90 ° toward the near side and interlock with the rotation of the two left and right second structures 712d are The structure 712b rotates in a direction closer to the direction than the state where the structure 712b is rotated 90 ° toward the front side.

  Further, the cover means 718 is inclined by about 135 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is invisible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a ( In this example, the LED) is visible from the front.

  FIG. 57 (d) shows a front view and a cross-sectional view when the first structure 712 b of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is rotated 180 ° toward the front side in the rotating operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b is rotated from 135 ° to 180 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b are replaced by the first structure 712b. The two third left and right third interlocked with the rotation of the two second structures 712d on the left and right sides are brought into contact with each other by rotating in directions closer to each other than the state rotated 135 ° toward the front side. The structures 712c are brought into contact with each other by rotating in a direction closer to the first structure 712b than in a state in which the first structure 712b is rotated 90 ° toward the near side.

  In addition, the two left and right second structures 712d and the two left and right third structures 712c are also in contact with each other, and the character is formed by the two left and right second structures 712d and the two right and left third structures 712c. Is done. Note that the cover means 718 is inclined by about 180 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the bar means 718 is not visible from the front, and the light emitting means 716a (the book) disposed on the fourth structure 712a. In the example, part of the LED) is also covered by the two left and right second structures 712d and the two left and right third structures 712c, and thus cannot be viewed from the front.

  <Various substrates>

  Next, various substrates provided in the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  <Various substrates / control boards, drive boards>

  FIG. 58A is a circuit block diagram showing main control circuits around the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 of this example is electrically connected to the sub-control board 245a described with reference to FIG. 53 and a board-to-board (hereinafter referred to as “BtoB”) connector to the sub-control board 245a. Motor drive board 245b. Note that the connection between the sub-control board 245a and the motor drive board 245b is not limited to a connection using a BtoB connector, and may be a connection using a harness or the like.

  The basic circuit 402 and the drive circuit 516 described with reference to FIG. 54 are mounted on the sub-control board 245a. In this example, the basic circuit 402 and the drive circuit 516 are each configured by a one-chip microcomputer. Can communicate with each other.

  Although details will be described later, the motor drive board 245b is mounted with electrical components that electrically connect the sub-control board 245a to another board, and the motor drive board 245b is a drive mounted on the sub-control board 245a. Input of effect control data from the circuit 516 and output of a drive signal (for example, a board LED PWM signal described later) for operating a motor or the like that is a drive source of the game board-side movable body 444 (for example, an accessory unit 950). Is possible.

  In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of two types of boards, a sub-control board 245a on which at least one microcomputer is mounted, and a motor drive board 245b on which no microcomputer is mounted. When there is a change in the specifications of the game board-side movable body (for example, the accessory unit 950), there is a case where only one motor drive board 245b can be replaced to cope with the change in the specifications, and the other sub-control board 245a By providing versatility, it may be possible to shorten the development period and reduce costs.

  The basic circuit 402 of the sub-control board 245a includes a game table frame lamp 542, a game board lamp 532, a speaker 120, and a game frame side movable body 442 (for example, glass using a front frame door (glass frame)). Button, shielding device (shutter), etc.), second sub-control unit 500, motor drive board 245b, etc. are connected. The motor drive board 245b is connected to a sub-control board 246a, a harness for electrically connecting the motor drive board 245b to another board, and the like.

  <Various boards / connections and locations>

  Next, connection relations and arrangement locations of various substrates included in the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  FIG. 58 (b) is a block diagram schematically showing a connection relationship between various substrates included in the pachinko machine 100. In this example, a board peripheral board 672 on which electrical components including a switching circuit are mounted is electrically connected to a motor drive board 245b electrically connected to the sub-control board 245a (FIG. 61 (a), FIG. 62). (Refer to FIG. 62A, FIG. 63A) and electrically connect the accessory peripheral substrate 674 on which no electrical component is mounted to the board peripheral substrate 672. An on-object lighting board 676 on which electrical components including power LEDs are mounted is electrically connected to the board 674 (see FIG. 63A).

  FIG. 59 (a) is a view of the game board 200 as viewed from the back, and is a view for explaining the arrangement locations of the sub control board 245a and the motor drive board 245b. In this example, a sub-control board case 245 is provided on the back surface of the game board 200, and the sub-control board 245a and the motor drive board 245b are accommodated in the inner space of the sub-control board case 245. Note that the substrate denoted by reference numeral 246a in FIG. 59 (a) is a liquid crystal control substrate constituting the second sub-control unit 500, and the substrate denoted by reference numeral 678 in FIG. 59 (a) is supplied from the power supply control unit 660. It is a sub power supply board that can supply the power to the sub control units such as the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500.

  FIG. 59 (b) is a view of a part of the game board 200 extracted from the front and is a view for explaining the placement location of the board peripheral board 672. In this example, the board surface peripheral board 672 is disposed in the vicinity of the stage 244 of the game board 200, and is electrically connected to the motor drive board 245b shown in FIG. 59A via a board surface peripheral board connection harness 678 described later. Has been.

  FIG. 60 (a) is a view seen from the front through a part of the game board 200, and is a view for explaining an arrangement place of the accessory peripheral board 674. FIG. In this example, the accessory peripheral board 674 is arranged on the upper left of the game board 200 in front view, and is electrically connected to the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 59B via a harness (not shown).

  FIG. 60B is a front view showing a part of the dropped and unfolded accessory unit 700 extracted, and is a view for explaining the arrangement place of the accessory-mounted illumination board 676. The on-workpiece illumination board 676 of this example is a board that constitutes a part of the drop-deployment-workpiece unit 700, and corresponds to the light-emitting board 716. The accessory lighting board 676 (light emitting board 716) is electrically connected to the accessory peripheral board 674 shown in FIG. 60A via a harness (not shown), and the first light emission composed of the power LED. Means 676a (716a) are provided.

  <Motor control board>

  Next, the motor control board 245b will be described. FIGS. 61A and 61B are diagrams showing an example of a connection relationship between the motor drive board 245b and another board and an example of electrical components mounted on the motor drive board 245b.

  The motor drive board 245b includes a BtoB connector 245b1 that can be connected to the BtoB connector 245a1 of the sub-control board 245b, and a connector 245b2 that can be connected to the connector 678a of the board peripheral board connection harness 678 connected to the board peripheral board 672. .

  The BtoB connector 245b1 of the motor drive board 245b is No. 1-No. 80 of 80 pins. The 31 pin is connected to the signal line of the panel LED PWM signal output from the drive circuit 516 mounted on the sub-control board 245a. The connector 245b2 of the motor drive board 245b is No. 1-No. 30 of 30 pins. The 26 pins are connected to the signal line of the panel LED PWM signal of the panel peripheral board connection harness 678.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 61 (b), the B.B connector 245b1 No. No. 31 pin and connector 245b2 No. Between the 26 pins, a first resistor 245b3, an IC 245b4, and a second resistor 245b5 are arranged in series as electrical components.

  <Board peripheral board>

  Next, the board peripheral board 672 will be described. 62A to 62C are diagrams showing an example of the connection relationship between the board surface peripheral board 672 and another board and an electrical component mounted on the board surface peripheral board 672. FIG.

  The board peripheral board 672 includes a motor drive board side connector 672a that can be connected to the connector 678b of the board peripheral board connection harness 678, and an accessory peripheral board side that can be connected to a harness connector (not shown) connected to the accessory peripheral board 674. And a connector 672b.

  The motor drive board side connector 672a is No. 1-No. 30 of 30 pins. The 26 pins are connected to the signal line of the panel LED PWM signal of the panel peripheral board connection harness 678. Further, the accessory peripheral board side connector 672b is No. 1-No. 30 of 30 pins. The 26 pins are connected to a signal line of a board surface LEDPWM signal of a harness (not shown) connected to the accessory peripheral board 674.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 62 (b), the No. of the motor drive board side connector 672a is shown. 26 pins and No. of the accessory peripheral board side connector 672b. Between the 26 pins, a first resistor 672c, a second resistor 672d, a switching circuit 672e made of an N-channel MOS FET, and a third resistor 672f are disposed as electrical components.

  The first resistor 672c is an operation stabilization resistor for the switching circuit 672e. The second resistor 672d is a ground resistor for setting the voltage between the gate and the source of the switching circuit 672e to 0v when the input signal of the switching circuit 672e is opened. The third resistor 672f is a current setting resistor of the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, a power LED) mounted on the accessory-mounted illumination board 676.

  No. of the motor drive board side connector 672a. When an ON signal composed of a predetermined voltage (a voltage that is larger than the gate threshold voltage of the switching circuit 672e and allows a sufficient drain current to flow, 5v in this example) is applied to the 26-pin LED PWM signal, switching is performed. The circuit 672e is turned from OFF to ON, and the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, the power LED) is turned on.

  In this example, since the MOS FET is applied as the switching circuit, the switching speed of turning on / off the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, the power LED) is higher than when other switching elements are applied. In addition to being able to increase the speed, there are cases where heat dissipation can be improved.

  In this example, an N-channel MOS FET is used as the switching circuit 672e. However, for example, a P-channel MOS FET may be used, or another switching element such as a transistor may be used.

  Further, the third resistor 672f is applied as the current setting resistor of the first light emitting means 676a (power LED in this example) mounted on the accessory lighting board 676, as shown in FIG. 62 (c). In addition, two third resistors 672f and a fourth resistor 672g connected in series may be applied as the current setting resistors.

  <Peripheral board>

  Next, the accessory peripheral substrate 674 and the accessory lighting substrate 676 will be described. FIG. 63A is a diagram showing a connection relationship between the accessory peripheral board 674 and the accessory lighting board 676 and another board. FIG. 63B is mounted on the accessory lighting board 676. It is the figure which showed an example of an electrical component.

  The accessory peripheral board 674 can be connected to a board peripheral board side connector 674a that can be connected to a harness connector (not shown) connected to the board peripheral board 672, and a harness 680 connector connected to the accessory lighting board 676. And an accessory lighting board side connector 674b.

  The board surface peripheral board side connector 674a is No. 1-No. 30 of 30 pins. The 26 pins are connected to a signal line of a board surface LEDPWM signal of a harness (not shown) connected to the board surface peripheral board 672. In addition, the accessory lighting board side connector 674b is No. 1-No. 22 of 22 pins. No. 17 pin is the No. of the illumination board 676 on the work. It is connected to electrical components mounted on the accessory-side lighting board 676 via 17 pins.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 63 (b), the No. Between the 17 pins and the power supply (7v power supply in this example), a first resistor 676b and a first light emitting means 676a (power LED in this example) are disposed as electrical components. Yes.

  In this example, a plurality of resistors (in this example, a first resistor 245b3 and a second resistor) arranged in series between the sub-control board 245a and the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, a power LED). The brightness of the first light emitting means 676a (power LED in this example) is set by setting the total resistance value of 245b5 and the first resistor 676b) to 15 ohms and the current passing through the first resistor 676b to about 270 milliamps. (Light intensity) is increased.

  <Variations of electrical components mounted on various substrates>

  Next, modified examples of electrical components mounted on various substrates will be described.

  <Variations of electrical components mounted on various substrates / Variation 1>

  FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram showing a first modification example of electrical components mounted on various substrates. In the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 63 (b), the No. of the accessory lighting board side connector 674b to which the panel LEDPWM signal is input is shown. The first resistor 676b and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) are arranged as electrical components between the 17 pin and the 7v power source. As shown in FIG. A second resistor 676c is further arranged in series between the first resistor 676b and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED), and this accessory-side lighting board 676 and the board peripheral board shown in FIG. 62 (b) 672 may be combined.

  According to this example, between the drain of the switching circuit 672e of the board peripheral board 672 and the 7v power source, three resistors (the third resistance 672f of the board peripheral board 672, the first resistor 676b of the work board lighting board 676, and A second resistor 676c) is arranged in series.

  <Modified example / Modified example 2 of electrical components mounted on various substrates>

  FIG. 64B is a diagram showing a second modification example of the electrical component mounted on various substrates. In the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 62 (c), the No. of the motor drive board side connector 672a to which the board LEDPWM signal is input is shown. No. 26 of the peripheral board side connector 672b of the accessory peripheral board on which the panel LED PWM signal is output. The first resistor 672c, the second resistor 672d, the switching circuit 672e, the third resistor 672f, and the fourth resistor 672g are disposed as electrical components between the 26 pins. 672 and the on-object lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 64 (a) may be combined.

  According to this example, between the drain of the switching circuit 672e of the board peripheral board 672 and the 7v power supply, four resistors (the third resistor 672f and the fourth resistance 672g of the board peripheral board 672, A first resistor 676b and a second resistor 676c) are arranged in series.

  <Variations of electrical components mounted on various substrates / Variation 3>

  Fig.65 (a) is the figure which showed the modification 3 of the electrical component mounted in various boards. As in the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 65A, the No. of the accessory lighting board side connector 674b to which the panel LEDPWM signal is input is input. Between the 17 pins and the 7v power source, two combinations of the first resistor 676b and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) are arranged in parallel as electrical components. You may combine with the board | substrate peripheral board | substrate 672 shown in FIG.62 (b).

  According to this example, a plurality (two in this example) of light emitting means are disposed on the accessory lighting board 676, and the luminance (light quantity) of each light emitting means can be set substantially the same. . In this example, two combinations of the first resistor 676b and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) are arranged in parallel. However, two or more sets may be arranged in parallel. A plurality of combinations of the resistor 676b and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) may be arranged in series.

  <Modified example / Modified example 4 of electrical components mounted on various substrates>

  FIG. 65B is a diagram showing a fourth modification example of the electrical components mounted on various substrates. As in the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 65B, the No. of the accessory lighting board side connector 674b to which the panel LEDPWM signal is input is input. A combination of the first resistor 676b and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED), the first resistor 676b, the second resistor 676c, and the first light emitting means as electrical components between the 17 pins and the 7v power source. A combination with 676a (power LED) may be arranged in parallel, and the functional board illumination board 676 and the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 62B may be combined.

  According to this example, a plurality of (two in this example) light emitting means are disposed on the accessory lighting board 676, and the luminance (light quantity) of each light emitting means can be varied.

  <Variations of electrical components mounted on various substrates / Variation 5>

  FIG. 66 (a) is a diagram showing a fifth modification example of the electrical components mounted on various substrates. As in the accessory illumination board 676 shown in FIG. 66 (a), the No. of the accessory illumination board side connector 674b to which the panel LEDPWM signal is input is input. Between the 17 pins and the 7v power source, only the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) is disposed as an electrical component, and the first resistor 674a is provided on the signal line of the panel LED PWM signal on the accessory peripheral board 674. It is also possible to arrange the combination lighting board 676 and the accessory peripheral board 674 with the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 62B.

  According to this example, the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) and the first resistor 674a which is one of the current setting resistors of the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) are arranged on different substrates. In some cases, the degree of freedom of design can be increased. In some cases, by disposing and arranging electrical components on a plurality of substrates, a situation in which heat is concentrated on a specific substrate may be avoided.

  <Variations of electrical components mounted on various substrates / Variation 6>

  FIG. 66 (b) is a diagram showing a sixth modification example of the electrical components mounted on various substrates. Like the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 66B, the third resistor 672f is excluded from the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 62B, and on the signal line of the board LEDPWM signal on the accessory peripheral board 674. A first resistor 674a may be provided, and the board peripheral board 672 and the accessory peripheral board 674 may be combined with the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 63 (b).

  According to this example, the first resistor 674a that is one of the current setting resistors of the first light emitting unit 676a (power LED) and the first light emitting unit 676a (power LED) are switched on / off. The switching circuit 672e and the switching circuit 672e can be provided over different substrates, which can increase the degree of freedom in design. In some cases, by disposing and arranging electrical components on a plurality of substrates, a situation in which heat is concentrated on a specific substrate may be avoided.

  <Variations of electrical components mounted on various substrates / Variation 7>

  FIG. 67 (a) is a diagram showing a seventh modification example of the electrical components mounted on various substrates. As in the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 67 (a), the No. of the accessory lighting board side connector 674b to which the panel LEDPWM signal is input is input. A first resistor 676b having a resistance value A, a second resistor 676c having a resistance value A, and a first light emitting means 676a (power LED) are arranged in series between the 17 pins and the 7v power source as electrical components. Alternatively, instead of the first resistor 676b having the resistance value A and the second resistor 676c having the resistance value A, a third resistor 676d having a resistance value B different from the resistance value A may be provided. In this case, if the resistance value B is twice the resistance value A, the luminance (light quantity) of the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) can be made the same, but the resistance value B is Other values may be used.

  According to this example, the number of electrical components can be reduced, and cost reduction can be achieved. Further, by making the resistance value of the resistor mounted on the illumination board 676 on the accessory different from the resistance value of the resistor mounted on the board peripheral board 672, the current value passed through the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) can be flexibly changed. In some cases, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  <Variations of electrical components mounted on various substrates / Variation 8>

  FIG. 67 (b) is a diagram showing a modification 8 of the electrical components mounted on various substrates. As in the accessory illumination board 676 shown in FIG. 67 (b), the No. of the accessory illumination board side connector 674b to which the panel LEDPWM signal is input is input. Between the 17 pin and the 7v power source, as electrical components, a third resistor 676d having a resistance value C, a fourth resistor 676e having a resistance value C different from the resistance value B, and a first light emitting means 676a (power LED) ) May be arranged in series.

  According to this example, there are cases where the degree of design freedom can be increased by making the resistance values of the plurality of resistors mounted on the accessory-mounted illumination board 676 different. Further, by making the resistance value of the resistor mounted on the illumination board 676 on the accessory different from the resistance value of the resistor mounted on the board peripheral board 672, the current value passed through the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) can be flexibly changed. In some cases, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  <Variation of connection relation of various substrates>

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a modified example of the connection relationship between various substrates. As shown in FIG. 68, the first substrate (for example, the board surface peripheral substrate 672) and the second substrate (for example, the on-object lighting substrate 676) may be electrically connected by a BtoB connector.

  When the surface area of the first substrate is larger than the surface area of the second substrate, the number of electrical components (for example, resistors) mounted on the first substrate is set to the number of electrical components mounted on the second substrate ( For example, the number may be larger than the number of resistors), or conversely, the number may be smaller. Further, when the surface area of the first substrate is larger than the surface area of the second substrate, a plurality of electrical components mounted on the first substrate are arranged in parallel, and a plurality of electrical components mounted on the second substrate May be arranged in series, or the number of electric components arranged in parallel on the first substrate may be larger than the number of electric components arranged in parallel on the second substrate.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a slot machine 2000 as shown in FIG. FIG. 69 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 2000 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  A slot machine 2000 shown in FIG. 69 includes a main body 2001 and a front door 2002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 2001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 2001. Inside the center of the main body 2001, three reels (left reel 2010, middle reel 2011, and right reel 2012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed and configured to rotate inside the slot machine 2000. Has been. These reels 2010 to 2012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 2000, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 2010 to 2012 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 2010 to 2012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 2013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating the reels 2010 to 2012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 2010 to 2012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the slot machine 2000, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 2000. However, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited thereto.

  Reel backlights (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 2013 are disposed on the rear surfaces of the reels 2010 to 2012. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be irradiated evenly. In the slot machine 2000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 2010 to 2012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of the sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 2010 to 2012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 2020 is a lamp indicating the winning line 2014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 2014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 2014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

  The notification lamp 2023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 2024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 2022 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (the medal insertion is unnecessary) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 2028 is an effect lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons 2030 to 2032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 2000. In the slot machine 2000, every time the medal insertion button 2030 is pressed, a maximum of three are inserted one by one, two are inserted when the medal insertion button 2031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 2032 is pressed. A sheet is inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 2032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 2029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 2021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 2041 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, the insertion of medals can be performed electronically with the medal insertion buttons 2030 to 2032, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 2041. It is. The stored number display 2025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 2000. The game information display 2026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during the bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display 2027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

  In the present embodiment, the stored number display unit 2025, the game information display unit 2026, and the payout number display unit 2027 are configured by a 7 segment (SEG) display unit.

  The start lever 2035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 2010 to 2012. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 2041 or the medal insertion buttons 2030 to 2032 are operated and the start lever 2035 is operated, the reels 2010 to 2012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 2035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 2036 is provided with stop buttons 2037 to 2039. The stop buttons 2037 to 2039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 2010 to 2012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 2035, and are associated with the reels 2010 to 2012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 2037 to 2039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Also, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is the third stop reel. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 2037 to 2039. When the stop button 2037 to 2039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 2033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The payment button 2034 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 2000 and betting medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 2055. The door key hole 2040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 2002 of the slot machine 2000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 2055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 2032, a chance button 2100 is provided. The chance button 2100 can perform an operation related to the operation of the reels 2010 to 2012, or can perform an operation related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 2057. Further, the chance button 2100 can take a plurality of states (for example, a light emission state, a rotation state, a vibration state, or a combination thereof) similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the chance button 2100 can be operated effectively. The state may be changeable during the period.

  The information display button unit 2050 is provided with an information display button 2046. The information display button 2046 is an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting individual player game history information), and includes a plurality of buttons. The configuration and operation of the information display button 2046 will be described later.

  Under the stop button unit 2036, a title panel 2062 for displaying a model name and pasting various certificate stamps is provided. A title panel lamp 2064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 2062. At the lower part of the title panel 2062, a medal payout opening 2055 and a medal tray 2061 are provided.

  The sound hole 2081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 2000 to the outside. Side lamps 2044 provided at the left and right portions of the front door 2002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 2060 is disposed above the front door 2002, and a sound hole 2043 is provided above the effect device 2060. This effect device 2060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 2063 composed of two right shutters 2063a and 2063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 2057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 2063. When the right shutter 2063a and the left shutter 2063b are opened outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 2057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 2057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 2000 (game). The structure appears on the person side).

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. In the present embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may be a curved surface.

  FIG. 70A is an external perspective view of the information display button 2046, and FIG. 70B is a top view of the information display button 2046. As shown in FIG. 70, the information display button 2046 includes a plurality of buttons on a substantially rectangular plane of the information display button unit 2050. That is, the information display button 2046 is a collective term for a plurality of buttons provided in the information display button unit 2050. Specifically, a determination (call) button 2046O provided in the approximate center of the information display button unit 2050 and a determination ( (Call) button 2046O spaced apart to the left of the upper selection button 2046U, the lower selection button 2046D, the left selection button 2046L and the right selection button 2046R, and the cancellation provided to the right of the decision (call) button 2046O. Button 2046C.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 51 or the slot machine 2000 shown in FIG. 69) according to this example has a plurality of boards (for example, the sub control board 245a shown in FIG. 58 (b)). , A game table including a motor drive board 245b, a board surface peripheral board 672, an accessory peripheral board 674, an accessory lighting board 676), and a production movable body (for example, a drop unfolding accessory 712), One of the plurality of substrates is a first substrate (for example, a board peripheral substrate 672 shown in FIG. 64A), and one of the plurality of substrates is a second substrate (for example, 64 (a), the second substrate is a substrate electrically connected to the first substrate, and the first substrate is the first substrate. Resistor (for example, the first of the peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 64A) A resistor 672f), and the second substrate is a substrate provided with a second resistor (for example, the first resistor 676b of the on-object lighting substrate 676 shown in FIG. 64A). The production movable body is a movable body provided with an electrical component (for example, the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) of the on-object lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 64 (a)). One resistor is a resistor connected in series with the second resistor, the first resistor is a resistor connected in series with the electrical component, and the second resistor is the electrical component It is a game machine characterized by being a resistor connected in series.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, there are cases where heat generated by resistance is distributed to a plurality of boards, so that problems caused by heat can be prevented and stable game control can be performed. In addition, each resistive component can be made smaller, and the degree of freedom in designing the layout of each substrate can be increased in some cases. For this reason, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the production movable body.

  The first board is a board provided at a position different from the stage movable body, and the second board is a board provided on the stage movable body, the electrical component. Is provided on the second substrate, and the second substrate is connected to the first substrate and a connector (for example, connectors 678a and 678b of the board peripheral board connection harness 678 shown in FIG. 61A). It may be a connected substrate.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where heat generation on the production movable body side can be reduced. Further, there are cases where the substrate on the production movable body side can be lightened. In addition, there is a case where the influence of static electricity generated when the connector is connected can be alleviated by a resistance provided on each substrate.

  The first substrate is a substrate provided with a third resistor (for example, the first resistor 672c of the board peripheral substrate 672 shown in FIG. 64A), and the third resistor is the first resistor. A resistor connected in series with one resistor, the third resistor is a resistor connected in series with the second resistor, and the third resistor is connected in series with the electrical component. It may be a resistance.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to reduce heat generation on the stage movable body side by providing a plurality of resistors on the first substrate side.

  Further, the first substrate may be a substrate provided with a switching circuit (for example, a switching circuit 672e (MOS FET) of the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 64A).

  With such a configuration, the first resistor (including the third resistor) may be able to alleviate that the switching circuit portion is affected when static electricity is generated.

  Also, a relay board (for example, the accessory peripheral board 674 shown in FIG. 63A) is provided, and the second board is a board electrically connected to the first board through the relay board. In addition, the relay board may be a board not provided with a resistor.

  With such a configuration, there are cases in which the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first substrate and the second substrate can be increased through the relay substrate. In some cases, static electricity does not occur on the first substrate side or the second substrate side by connecting the connector on the relay substrate side last.

  The first board and / or the second board may be a board connected to the relay board by a connector. The relay board may be a board provided with an electrical component other than a resistor, or a board provided only with a connector for electrically connecting the first board and the second board. It may be.

  The resistance value of the second resistor may be the same value as the resistance value of the first resistor.

  With such a configuration, when the number of resistors of the first substrate and the second substrate is the same, the amount of heat generated may be evenly distributed. In some cases, the resistance component placed on one of the first substrate and the second substrate can be prevented from becoming large.

  The electrical component may be a power LED. With such a configuration, although heat is generated by the power LED on the stage movable body side, in some cases, heat generation can be effectively reduced by providing a part of the resistance on the first substrate.

  The electrical component is a power LED, and in a state before the stage movable body moves, the power LED cannot be visually recognized by a player, and the stage movable body moves when the stage movable body moves. The power LED may be configured to be visible from the player. With such a configuration, it may be possible to dissipate heat in relation to the operation of the movable body.

  Also, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 51 or the slot machine 2000 shown in FIG. 69) according to this example has a plurality of boards (for example, the sub control board 245a, motor shown in FIG. 58 (b)). The driving board 245b, the board peripheral board 672, the accessory peripheral board 674, and the accessory lighting board 676) and the first electric component (for example, the switching circuit 672e (MOS FET) of the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. )), A second electrical component (for example, the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) of the on-object lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 64A), and the second electrical component for driving the second electrical component A game machine including a driving circuit (for example, a basic circuit 402 and a driving circuit 516 shown in FIG. 58A, a resistor and a switching circuit shown in FIG. 64A), and a plurality of boards. One of the plurality of substrates is a first substrate (for example, the board peripheral substrate 672 shown in FIG. 64A), and one of the plurality of substrates is a second substrate (for example, FIG. 64A). The second board is connected to the first board by a connector (for example, the connectors 678a and 678b of the board peripheral board connection harness 678 shown in FIG. 61 (a)). The drive circuit is a circuit provided with a plurality of resistors, and one of the plurality of resistors is a first resistor (for example, a board peripheral board shown in FIG. 64A). 672, a third resistor 672f), and one of the plurality of resistors is a second resistor (for example, the first resistor 676b of the on-object lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 64A), The first substrate is a substrate provided with the first resistor. The second substrate is a substrate provided with the second resistor, the first substrate is a substrate provided with the first electrical component, and the second substrate is A gaming machine characterized by being a board provided with a second electrical component.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, there is a case where the influence of static electricity generated when the connector is connected can be alleviated by the resistance provided on each board. For this reason, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the drive circuit of the production movable body.

  Also, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 51 or the slot machine 2000 shown in FIG. 69) according to this example has a plurality of boards (for example, the sub control board 245a, motor shown in FIG. 58 (b)). A driving board 245b, a board surface peripheral board 672, an accessory peripheral board 674, an accessory lighting board 676), a first electrical component (for example, an IC 245b4 of the motor driving board 245b shown in FIG. 61A), and a second Electrical components (for example, the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) of the on-workboard illumination board 676 shown in FIG. 64A) and a drive circuit for driving the second electrical components (for example, FIG. 58 (a), a basic circuit 402, a driving circuit 516, and a resistor, an IC, and a switching circuit shown in FIG. 61 (b) and FIG. 64 (a). Our One is a first substrate (for example, the motor drive substrate 245b shown in FIG. 61A), and one of the plurality of substrates is a second substrate (for example, shown in FIG. 64A). A lighting board 676), and one of the plurality of boards is a third board (for example, the sub-control board 245a shown in FIG. 61A), and the second board is The first board and the third board are connected by a connector, the third board is a board connected by the first board and a BtoB connector, and the first board and the third board are The drive circuit is a circuit provided with a plurality of resistors, and is housed in one substrate case (for example, the sub-control substrate case 245 shown in FIG. 53). One resistor (for example, the motor drive board 24 shown in FIG. 61B) b, the first resistor 245b3), and one of the plurality of resistors is a second resistor (for example, the first resistor 676b of the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 64A), One of the first substrate and the third substrate is a substrate provided with the first resistor, and the other of the first substrate and the third substrate is , The first electric component is provided on the substrate, the second substrate is provided on the second resistor, and the second substrate is provided on the second electric component. This is a gaming machine characterized by being a printed board.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, there is a case where the influence of static electricity generated when the connector is connected can be alleviated by the resistance provided on each board. For this reason, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the drive circuit of the production movable body.

  It is to be noted that the production movable body (for example, the drop unfolding accessory 712) is provided, the first substrate is a substrate provided at a position different from the production movable body, and the second substrate is It is a board | substrate provided in the said movable body for presentation, Said 2nd electrical component may be provided in said 2nd board | substrate.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where heat generation on the production movable body side can be reduced. Further, there are cases where the substrate on the production movable body side can be lightened.

  The first resistor is a resistor connected in series with the second resistor, the first resistor is a resistor connected in series with the electrical component, and the second resistor is A resistor connected in series with the electrical component may be used.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to reduce heat generation on the stage movable body side by providing a plurality of resistors on the first substrate side.

  Also, a relay board (for example, the accessory peripheral board 674 shown in FIG. 63A) is provided, and the second board is a board electrically connected to the first board through the relay board. In addition, the relay board may be a board not provided with a resistor related to the drive circuit.

  With such a configuration, there are cases in which the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first substrate and the second substrate can be increased through the relay substrate. In some cases, static electricity does not occur on the first substrate side or the second substrate side by connecting the connector on the relay substrate side last.

  The resistance value of the second resistor may be the same value as the resistance value of the first resistor.

  With such a configuration, when the number of resistors of the first substrate and the second substrate is the same, the amount of heat generated may be evenly distributed. In some cases, the resistance component placed on one of the first substrate and the second substrate can be prevented from becoming large.

  Further, the number of resistors may be singular or plural for the first substrate and the second substrate, respectively. Further, the number of resistors may be increased on one substrate or may be different. In addition, factors other than heat generation may be taken into consideration as factors that make the number of resistors different. For example, the number may be changed depending on the surface area and vertical and horizontal dimensions of the first substrate and the second substrate. It may be determined by the number of electrical components related to other circuits. The first electrical component may be an electrical component related to a switching circuit, and the second electrical component may be a power LED.

  The plurality of resistors may be the same component, may be different from each other, or may have different resistance values. Generally, the resistance component tends to increase as the resistance value increases, and can be determined as appropriate depending on the number of resistors, the area of the substrate, and the like.

  The electrical component according to the present invention can also be applied to electrical components other than LEDs. In addition, the second board may be applied to the movable body and the lighting board on the game platform side instead of the movable body on the game board side, or one of the first board and the second board. May be provided on the game board side, and the other board may be provided on the frame side.

  Further, a resistor may be provided on the relay substrate according to the present invention. Further, the switching circuit and the resistor may be provided on separate substrates, or the LED (electrical component) and the resistor may be provided on separate substrates. Moreover, the structure by which multiple LED and resistance were provided in parallel may be sufficient, and the electrical component and resistance may be connected in parallel.

  Further, the first substrate and the second substrate may be connected by a BtoB connector, and there may be a plurality of resistors on the second substrate side. Further, at least one of the substrates may be accommodated in the substrate case. Moreover, the number of electrical components may be plural, for example, a configuration in which plural LEDs are connected in parallel may be employed.

  Moreover, the electrical component according to the present invention may be a drive source for a movable body for production such as a solenoid or a motor. In addition, the electrical connection between the board and the board may be a floating connector. For example, a relay board that relays the first board on the game board side and the second board on the frame side (front frame or game board). ) And a connection by a connector connecting portion provided on the relay board and the other floating connector. Moreover, you may electrically connect a board | substrate and a board | substrate with a flexible harness.

  Moreover, the electrical component may be mounted only on one side of the substrate, or may be mounted on both sides of the substrate. Further, only the power LED in the embodiment may be mounted on the player side surface, and the resistor and the like may be mounted on the opposite side surface. Further, in the present embodiment, the power LED of the production movable body is visible during operation, but the power LED itself may not be visually recognized by a lens or the like. Moreover, the structure which can be visually recognized from a player may be sufficient even when operation | movement of the production movable body is not performed.

  Further, the second substrate may not be configured to move in relation to the operation of the production movable body. For example, only the production movable body (not including the second substrate) operates and is related to the operation. The power LED of the second substrate may emit light in the state. According to this configuration, the weight of the effect movable body may be reduced.

  Further, if the first substrate and the second substrate are configured so that they are not accommodated in the substrate case, the substrate and the electrical components may be efficiently radiated.

  <Error notification>

  Next, error notification will be described. This “error notification” is a notification for notifying at least a store clerk of an amusement store that some error (abnormality) has been detected in the pachinko machine 100.

  As the “error notification” in this example, for example, error notification by the light emitting means, error notification by the sound output means (for example, the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 51), error notification by the rendering means, display means (for example, FIG. Error notification by the decorative symbol display device 208) shown in 52, error notification by outputting an external terminal board signal from the external output means, and the like.

  Note that the light emitting means for performing error notification is a light emitting means for which light emission control is performed by the main control unit 300 (for example, a general-purpose display device 210, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a right-handed lamp). , Ordinary figure hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high-accuracy medium lamp 222, probability variation function display lamp (lamp indicating that the probability of the special figure is in a high-accuracy state) , Fluctuation time shortening function indicator lamp (lamp indicating that the special figure and / or usual figure fluctuation time is in a state of short time), Open extension function indicator lamp (a state in which the operating state of the ordinary figure electric utility is extended ( The state where the opening time of the electric Chu is extended), the right-handed display lamp (the lamp indicating that the firing position specified by the main control is the right-handed gaming state), the round display lamp (number of big hit rounds) Depending lamp which emits light in the jackpot in)) is free.

  Even if the light emission means is controlled by the first sub-control unit 400, some lamps included in the light emission means (for example, the 4th design lamp, the holding lamp, the lamp indicating how to hit) No error notification is performed. Here, the error notification by the light emitting means indicates that light is emitted with the light emission pattern for error notification, and does not include the case where the light emitting means is turned off during the error notification. The case where the light emitting means is turned off may be included.

  <Error notification / Errors that can be detected by the main controller>

  Next, errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100.

  The errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example include a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) disconnection error, a magnetic field (radio wave) error, a switch (sensor) level abnormality error, and a winning rate. (General winning opening, start opening 2 (electricity chew), large winning opening (attacker)) Abnormal error, impact abnormal error, and the like.

  The magnetism (magnet) detection error is an error that occurs when magnetism (magnet) is detected by a wide range magnetic sensor. The switch (sensor) unconnected error is an error that occurs when a switch (sensor) power supply is supplied and an unconnected state of the panel switch (sensor) is detected. A magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error that occurs when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor detects a magnetic field (radio wave).

  The switch (sensor) level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a big ball is suspected. Among the winning rate abnormality errors, the error of the general winning opening is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the general winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226 shown in FIG. 52) is an abnormal value. The error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected when a normal electric accessory (for example, the second special figure starting port 232 shown in FIG. 52) is not activated, and an error of the big prize opening Is an error that occurs when the number of winnings in a big winning opening (for example, the variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 52) is an abnormal value.

  An impact abnormality error is detected when the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF (= power is ON) and during a specific area valid period (for example, detection of a game ball entering the specific area 808 shown in FIG. 66 is valid). This is an error that occurs when the level of the impact sensor changes from OFF to ON during a predetermined period and the ON state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 12 ms).

  In this example, the uppermost stage (magnetic (magnet) detection error) in FIG. 71 is the highest priority error because the main control unit 300 is prohibited from operating (not playable). Other errors may be top-priority errors, although less frequently. The details of the error occurrence conditions, the return conditions, the detection operation in the main control unit 300, and the return operation in the main control unit 300 are as shown in FIG. The term “when the winning end display period ends” of the return condition of the winning rate abnormality error of the big winning opening (attacker) means that the end display period of the big winning or the small winning end has ended.

  <Errors that can be detected by the error notification / payout control unit>

  Next, errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100.

  The errors that can be detected by the dispensing control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 in this example include a tray full tank error (bottom tray full tank error), a dispensed number shortage error, a dispensed number switch error, an unauthorized dispensing error, an excessively paid out error, a CR unit. Communication error, main control communication error (error when communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 is not received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example), CR unit not connected error, glass frame open error, inner frame open In addition to errors and door opening errors, there are magnetic abnormality errors, external clock abnormality errors, magnetic field abnormality errors, switch level abnormality errors, switch disconnection errors, impact sensor errors, etc. (not shown).

  Moreover, each error occurrence condition, return condition, payout operation in the payout device 152, and fire operation in the launch device 110 are as shown in FIG. Note that “stop” described in the item “stop firing” shown in the figure is synonymous with turning off the firing permission signal.

  FIG. 72B is a diagram showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error, which is a condition for generating a door opening error. The door open error occurs when at least one of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error is in the generated state, and enters the released state when both the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error are in the released state. It is an error.

  <Error notification / other examples>

  The above-mentioned magnetic (magnet) detection errors include other errors (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection errors, switch non-connection errors (errors related to connector disconnection or disconnection of devices controlled by the main control unit), shock abnormality errors, (Payout control communication error, switch level error error, winning rate error error, door open error, upper plate full error), the priority may be higher, or the priority may be the same.

  In addition, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error and a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occur at the same time, if the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error satisfies the output condition first, the operation for the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is performed. After the execution, an operation of a magnetic (magnet) detection error may be executed. In that case, all the devices (decorative symbol display device) in which the notification by the decorative symbol display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 is notified from the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error to the magnetic (magnet) detection error. 208, lamps 418, 532, 542, and speaker 120, etc.) may be switched (overwrite data), and only one or more partial devices (eg, speaker 120) may be overwritten and others One or a plurality of devices may continue notification for a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error.

  <Specific example of error notification / notification mode>

  Next, a specific example of an error notification mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100.

  The errors that can be detected by the pachinko machine 100 in this example are (1) errors related to payout (payout control unit 600), (2) errors related to power supply (power supply control unit 660), and (3) main control (main control unit 300). Etc., and (4) warnings related to sub-controls (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500). Each will be described below.

  <Specific example of error notification / notification mode / payout error>

  First, an error related to payout will be described. Examples of the “error related to payout (payout control unit 600)” in this example include a tray full tank error, a glass frame opening error, a payout number shortage error, a payout excess error, an illegal payout error, and a payout number switch error.

  In this example, when an underfill full tank error occurs, the number “2” is applied to the light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). In addition to performing notification by the light emitting means by displaying, notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, the display of characters indicating that the under-plate full error has occurred), and sound output means (In this example, a loudspeaker 120) is notified (in this example, a sound effect sound is output to the effect that an underfill full tank error has occurred).

  When a glass frame opening error occurs, the number “1” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, a 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and the second light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED ( Flashing of the frame lamp or panel lamp), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a glass frame opening error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example) Then, a notification (sounding a sound effect indicating that an underfill full tank error has occurred) is performed by the speaker 120).

  Further, when a payout number shortage error occurs, the number “3” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, a 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and notification by the third light emitting means (LED for payout illumination in this example) (lighting LED for payout illumination is turned on in this example). Note that other error notification modes relating to payout, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG.

  <Error notification / specific example of notification mode / power supply error>

  Next, an error relating to the power supply will be described. Examples of the “error relating to the power supply (power supply control unit 660)” in this example include a blown fuse 1, a blown fuse 2, and a blown fuse 3. In this example, when an error relating to the power supply occurs, error notification is not performed. The cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG.

  <Error notification / specific example of notification mode / error related to main control>

  Next, errors relating to main control and the like will be described. “Errors related to main control (main control unit 300), etc.” in this example include main control communication error, CR unit unconnected error, CR unit communication error, magnetism (magnet) detection error, external clock error, magnetic field (radio wave) ) Detection error, switch level error, door open error, switch disconnection error, impact error error, winning rate error error.

  In this example, when a main control communication error occurs, the number “8” is displayed on the light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). In addition to performing notification by the light emitting means by displaying, notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a main control communication error has occurred), and sound output means (In this example, a loudspeaker 120) is notified (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a main control communication error has occurred) is performed.

  When a CR unit non-connection error occurs, the number “9” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, a 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). ”Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and notification by the second light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED). (Flashing of frame lamps and panel lamps), notification by display means (in this example, decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a CR unit unconnected error has occurred), and sound output Notification (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a CR unit non-connection error has occurred) is performed by means (speaker 120 in this example).

  When a CR unit communication error occurs, the number “7” is displayed on the light emitting means (in this example, a 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Thus, notification by the light emitting means is performed. In addition, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs, a notification (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp) is provided by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)). Lamp)), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example) Then, notification (sounding a sound effect indicating that a magnetism (magnet) detection error has occurred) is performed by the speaker 120).

  Further, when a door opening error occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decoration LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decoration LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) Blinking), notification by display means (in this example, decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display that a door opening error has occurred), and notification by sound output means (in this example, speaker 120) ( In this example, a sound effect indicating that a door opening error has occurred is performed). Note that other error notification modes relating to the main control, etc., the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG.

  <Error notification / specific example of notification mode / error related to sub-control>

  Next, errors relating to sub-control will be described. Examples of the “error relating to the sub-control (the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500)” in this example include an impact warning and a hitting warning. In this example, when an impact warning occurs, notification (in this example, display of characters indicating that an impact warning has occurred) is performed by display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208). No notification will be made.

  Further, when a hitting warning is generated, notification (display of characters indicating that a hitting warning has occurred in this example) by display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) and sound output means ( In this example, a notification is made by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a strike warning has occurred), but the notification by the light emitting means is not performed.

  <Lamp control processing>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85, a lamp control process executed by the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. The lamp control process is a process executed in step S317 of the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG.

  The “lamp” in the present embodiment and other embodiments is, for example, light emitting means including an LED, and the LED in the present embodiment is a power LED and a standard LED other than the power LED (hereinafter referred to as “LED”). , A standard LED). Here, the power LED refers to an LED that emits light with higher luminance than the standard LED or an LED that can pass a larger current than the standard LED even when the same current as that of the standard LED flows. Further, the power LED of the present embodiment includes what is called a high brightness LED or a high power LED. In addition, the configuration described as “power LED” in the present embodiment can be changed to a light emitting means other than an LED that can flow a larger current than a standard (general) light emitting means. .

  The lamp control process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of the lamp control process.

  First, in step S2201, lamp data other than the power LED is updated, and the process proceeds to step S2203.

  In step S2203, luminance data setting processing for updating the luminance of the set lamp data is performed. In subsequent step S2205, power LED update processing is performed, and the processing ends. The power LED update process will be described later.

  The brightness data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of luminance data setting processing.

  First, in step S2301, the brightness adjustment value set by the user is acquired.

  In the next step S2303, it is determined whether or not system data is output. If there is no system data output, the process proceeds to step S2305. If not (when system data is output), the process proceeds to step S2307. . When an error command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the error light emission pattern data, the light emission pattern data at the time of power-on, etc. are used to notify the error (see FIG. 73). Output as data. That is, the system data is data of a light emission pattern other than the effect.

  In step S2305, which proceeds when it is determined in step S2303 that there is no system data output (No), all port lamp output processing is performed, and the processing ends.

  On the other hand, in step S2307, which proceeds when it is determined in step S2303 that there is system data output (Yes), an error light emission is output when an error command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. A system data output process for outputting data of light emission patterns other than effects such as pattern data and data of light emission patterns output when the power is turned on is performed, and the process ends. The system data output process will be described later.

  With reference to FIG. 75, the all-port lamp output process (step S2305 of the luminance data setting process shown in FIG. 74B) will be described. This figure is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of all port lamp output processing.

  First, in step S2401, the system lamp timer Ts is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S2403. The system lamp is a lamp other than the lamp for game information, such as a lamp that blinks when an error occurs. For example, the game information lamp is controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 for displaying the fourth symbol for indicating that the special game is in a variable game or for displaying the number of holdings. A lamp (LED)

  In step S2403, it is determined whether or not the target lamp is a game information lamp based on the port address, and a game information lamp (for example, a holding lamp controlled by the first sub-control unit or a lamp for lighting) In the case of a 4th symbol lamp or the like, the processing is terminated. Otherwise (in the case of not being a game information lamp), the process proceeds to step S2405. In this step, it is determined whether or not the game information lamp is used, and the process proceeds to step S2405 only in the case of an effect lamp. Is not blinked or turned off (so that the game information is reported correctly).

  In step S2405, the process proceeds to the case of No in the determination in step S2403 (in the case of an effect lamp), it is determined whether the data for driving the power LED set in the port, such as the box data setting, is lighting data. If it is determined that the data is lighting data, the process proceeds to step S2407; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2409. Data for driving the power LED is, for example, lighting data for turning on the power LED when ON (H), and data for turning off the power LED when OFF (L).

  In step S2407, the process proceeds to the case where the determination in step S2405 is Yes (in the case of lighting data), the brightness adjustment value set by the user is reflected (set) in the set port, and the process proceeds to step S2411.

  In step S2409, the process proceeds to the case where the determination in step S2405 is No (when the data is not lighting data), “0” is set as the luminance in the set port, and the process proceeds to step S2411.

  In step S2411, it is determined based on the port address whether or not the target is a power LED port. If so, the process proceeds to step S2413; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2415.

  In step S2413, power LED control processing is performed, and the flow proceeds to step S2415. The power LED control process will be described later. In step S2415, data is set (brightness is set) in the lamp driver, and the process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 76, the system data output process (step S2307 of the luminance data setting process shown in FIG. 74B) will be described. This figure is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of system data output processing.

  First, in step S2501, the system lamp timer Ts is updated, and the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, it is determined whether or not the system lamp maximum extinguishing time has been reached. If it has been reached, the process proceeds to step S2505, and if not (if not reached), the process proceeds to step S2507.

  In step S2505, the system lamp timer Ts (for example, a timer for informing the error by flashing the gaming platform frame lamp 542 at the time of error) (see FIG. 73) is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S2507.

  In step S2507, it is determined whether or not the value of the system lamp timer Ts is equal to or greater than 0 and within the lighting time of the gaming table frame lamp 542. If yes, the process proceeds to step S2509. Proceed to For example, when the game table frame lamp 542 is blinked at the time of an error, the light emission pattern of the system lamp is blinking (for example, 8 seconds, etc., repeatedly turned off for 16 seconds). The value of Ts is determined.

  In step S2509, which proceeds when the determination in step S2507 is Yes, the luminance of the game table frame lamp 542 is set to the maximum value to turn on, and the process proceeds to step S2511. In step S2511, the luminance of the game board lamp 532 is set to the minimum value to turn it off, and the process proceeds to step S2517.

  In step S2513, which proceeds when the determination in step S2507 is No, the luminance of the game table frame lamp 542 is set to the minimum value to turn off, and the process proceeds to step S2515. In step S2515, the luminance of the game board lamp 532 is set to the minimum value to turn it off, and the process proceeds to step S2517.

  In step S2517, it is determined whether or not the target is a game information lamp. If not, the process proceeds to step S2519. If the target is a game information lamp, the process ends.

  In step S2519, it is determined whether or not the target is the gaming platform frame lamp 542. If so, the process proceeds to step S2521, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2523.

  In step S2521, the brightness of the gaming frame frame lamp 542 is set in the lamp driver, and the process ends. In step S2523, which proceeds if the determination in step S2519 is No, the brightness of the game board lamp 532 is set in the lamp driver, and the process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 77, the power LED control process (step S2413 of the all-port lamp output process shown in FIG. 75) will be described. The figure is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of power LED control processing.

  First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the status of the power LED set in the predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 408 is “idle”. If “idle”, the process proceeds to step S2603; If YES, go to step S2605.

  In step S2603, a power LED idle status change process is performed, and the process ends. The power LED idle status change process will be described later.

  In step S2605, it is determined whether or not the status is “lighting”. If it is “lighting”, the process proceeds to step S2607; otherwise, the process ends.

  In step S2607, the power LED lighting status change process is performed, and the process ends. The status change process when the power LED is turned on will be described later.

  In step S2609, it is determined whether or not the status is “lighting out”. If it is “lighting out”, the process proceeds to step S2611, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2613.

  In step S2611, a status change process is performed when the power LED is turned off, and the process ends. The status change process when the power LED is turned off will be described later.

  In step S2613, it is determined whether or not the status is “limit monitoring in progress”. If the status is “limit monitor in progress”, the process proceeds to step S2615; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2617.

  In step S2615, a power LED restriction monitoring status change process is performed, and the process ends. The power LED restriction monitoring status change process will be described later. In step S2617, it is determined that some abnormality has occurred, the data is changed from lighting to extinguishing (H → L) (turned off), and the process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 78 (a), the power LED idle time status change process will be described. This figure is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of status change processing during power LED idling.

  First, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the power LED is to be turned on based on the setting state of the lighting data. If the power LED is to be turned on, the process proceeds to step S2703, and if not (the case is not turned on), the process ends.

  In step S2703, the status is set to “lighting”, and the process proceeds to step S2705. In step S2705, the maximum lighting time (for example, 15 seconds) of the power LED is set. In step S2707, the lighting time is cleared. In step S2709, the extinguishing time is cleared, and the process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 78 (b), the status change process at the time of power LED lighting is demonstrated. This figure is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of status change processing when the power LED is lit.

  First, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the power LED is turned off based on the setting state of the lighting data. If the power LED is turned off, the process proceeds to step S2803. If not (the lamp is not turned off), the process ends.

  In step S2803, the status is set to “lighting out”, and the process proceeds to step S2805. In step S2805, the time limit is set to the number of lighting times × N (for example, N = 3). In step S2807, the extinguishing time is cleared and the process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 79A, the status change process when the power LED is turned off will be described. This figure is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of status change processing when the power LED is turned off.

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the power LED is to be turned on based on the setting state of the lighting data. If it is to be turned on, the process proceeds to step S2903. If not (the case is not turned on), the process ends.

  In step S2903, the status is set to “lighting”, and the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, the turn-off time is cleared and the process is terminated.

  With reference to FIG. 79 (b), the power LED restriction monitoring status change process will be described. This figure is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of status change processing during power LED limit monitoring.

  First, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the power LED is to be turned on based on the setting state of the lighting data. If the power LED is to be turned on, the process proceeds to step S3003, and if not (the case is not turned on), the process ends. In step S3003, the brightness of the power LED is set to the minimum (the power LED is turned off), and the process ends.

  The power LED update process (step S2205 of the lamp control process shown in FIG. 74A) will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of power LED update processing.

  First, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the power LED status is “lighting”. If it is “lighting”, the process proceeds to step S3103; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3105.

  In step S3103, an update process is performed when the power LED is lit, and the process ends. The power LED lighting update process will be described later.

  In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the status is “lighting out”. If it is “lighting off”, the process proceeds to step S3107, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3109.

  In step S3107, an update process is performed when the power LED is turned off, and the process ends. The update process when the power LED is turned off will be described later.

  In step S3109, it is determined whether or not the status is “limit monitoring in progress”. If the status is “limit monitor in progress”, the process proceeds to step S3111; otherwise, the process ends.

  In step S3111, a power LED limit monitoring update process is performed, and the process ends. The power LED restriction monitoring update process will be described later.

  With reference to FIG. 80 (b), the update process at the time of power LED lighting is demonstrated. This figure is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of the update process when the power LED is turned on.

  First, in step S3201, the lighting time is updated, and the process proceeds to step S3203. In step S3203, it is determined whether or not the lighting time has reached a limit value. If the limit value has been reached, the process proceeds to step S3205. If not, the process ends. Here, the limit value of lighting time is the maximum lighting time (for example, 15 seconds). Further, even when the light is turned off after lighting, it can be turned on again if the lighting time does not exceed the maximum lighting time. The lighting time limit value is the maximum lighting time when the lighting time exceeds the maximum lighting time, or the lighting time set with lighting data shorter than the maximum lighting time. Good. Here, if the lighting time limit value is “lighting time set with lighting data shorter than the maximum lighting time”, even if the lighting time is shorter than the maximum lighting time, it shifts to limit monitoring. be able to.

  In step S3205, the minimum value (0) of the brightness of the power LED is set in the lamp driver to turn off the power LED. In the following step S3207, the status is set to “limit monitoring in progress”, in step S3209 the maximum turn-off time of the power LED (for example, lighting time × N) is set as the lighting limit time, and in step S3211 the lighting time is cleared. In step S3213, the turn-off time is cleared and the process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 81 (a), the update process when the power LED is turned off will be described. This figure is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of the power LED on / off process.

  First, in step S3301, the lighting time is updated, and the process proceeds to step S3303. The lamp control process shown in FIG. 74A is executed even when an error occurs. That is, the power LED may be blinking at the time of an error, so the lighting time is updated in this step. In the following step S3303, the turn-off time is updated. Since the power LED may blink when an error occurs, the extinguishing time is also updated in this step. In step S3305, it is determined whether the turn-off time has reached a limit value (maximum turn-off time = lighting time × N, in this embodiment, maximum turn-off time = maximum lighting time × N). If YES in step S3307, the process advances to step S3307; otherwise, the process ends.

  In step S3307, the status is set to “idle”. In subsequent step S3309, the lighting limit time is cleared, in step S3311, the lighting time is cleared, in step S3313, the extinguishing time is cleared, and the process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 81 (b), the power LED restriction monitoring update process will be described. The figure is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of the power LED lighting limit monitoring process.

  First, in step S3401, the turn-off time is updated, and the process proceeds to step S3403. In step S3403, it is determined whether or not a maximum extinguishing time (for example, lighting time × N) has been reached. If the maximum extinguishing time has been reached, the process proceeds to step S3405, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S3405, the status is set to “idle”. In subsequent step S3407, the lighting limit time is cleared. In step S3409, the lighting time is cleared. In step S3411, the lighting time is cleared.

  FIG. 82 to FIG. 85 are examples of timing charts showing the relationship between power LED driving data (lighting data) and output in this embodiment.

  As described above, the power LED driving data is, for example, lighting data for turning on the power LED when it is ON (H), and is turning-off data for turning off the power LED when it is OFF (L). The power LED of the present embodiment is controlled to be lit based on the maximum lighting time (for example, 15 seconds) that can be continuously lit and the lighting limit time that is limited (turned off) according to the lighting time. The

  In FIG. 82A, the relationship between the lighting time T1 and the subsequent lighting limit time (light-out time) T2 is T2 = T1 × N (the lighting limit time T2 is an integral multiple of the lighting time T1, lighting time: light-off time = 1). : N relationship) is a timing chart.

  Data for driving the power LED is data that is turned on (ON, H) at timing a and turned off (OFF, L) at timing b. In this example, the lighting time T1 from timing a to timing b is, for example, a time within the maximum lighting time of data for driving the power LED, and the lighting limit time T2 is three times the lighting time T1. In this case, for example, the power LED is turned on for 1 second from timing a to timing b (T1 = 1 second), and then is turned off for 3 seconds from timing b to timing c (T2 = 3 seconds). It becomes possible to light up again.

  FIG. 82B is a timing chart when the lighting time T4 of the power LED driving data exceeds the maximum lighting time T3 (for example, 15 seconds).

  The data for driving the power LED is data that is turned on (ON, H) at timing d and turned off (OFF, L) at timing f. In this example, the lighting time T4 from timing d to timing f is a time (T4> T3) that exceeds the maximum lighting time T3 (for example, 15 seconds) of data for driving the power LED. In this case, the power LED is forcibly turned off after the time T3 has elapsed since turning on. For example, the lighting is performed for 15 seconds from timing d to timing e (T3 = 15 seconds), and after that, the driving data is lighting data after timing e, but lighting is limited (turns off). Further, the lighting restriction period after timing e is a period N times (for example, three times) the maximum lighting time T3.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the power LED can be turned on when the first lighting period (for example, the period T1 in FIG. 82A and the period T3 in FIG. 82B) starts. When the first lighting period ends, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to turn off when the first lighting period ends. An extinguishing period (for example, a period T2 in FIG. 82A and a period T3 × N after timing e in FIG. 82B) corresponding to the first lighting period is set.

  Here, the first lighting period is the first lighting time (for example, the lighting time of lighting data (the length of time T1 in FIG. 82A)) or the maximum lighting after the power LED is in the lighting state. It is a period that ends when the time (the length of time T3 in FIG. 5B) elapses. The extinguishing period is a period that ends when the extinguishing time elapses after the first lighting period ends. The turn-off time is a time that is N times (for example, 3 times) the first turn-on time, where N is a real number (natural number, decimal number).

  FIG. 83C is a timing chart in the case where the drive data is turned on during the power LED turn-off period (lighting restricted).

  Data A for driving the power LED is data that is turned on (ON, H) at timing g, and is turned off (OFF, L) at timing h, and data B for driving the power LED is turned on at timing i. (ON, H) and data that is turned off (OFF, L) at timing k. In this example, after the lighting is finished, lighting is limited for a predetermined period corresponding to the lighting time (for example, an integral multiple of the lighting time).

  The lighting time T1 from the timing g to the timing h and the lighting time T5 from the timing i to the timing k are both times that do not exceed the maximum lighting time of the data for driving the power LED. In this case, the power LED is turned off after the time T1 has elapsed from the start of lighting at timing g, and the lighting is restricted from timing h to timing j. This lighting restriction period T8 is, for example, three times as long as T1. For example, even if lighting data (data B) that starts lighting from timing i is input during the lighting limit time T8, lighting is limited for the time until timing j when the lighting limitation period T8 ends. (Turn off time T6). The lighting time T7 is again from the timing j after the lighting restriction time T8 ends to the timing k at which the data B is turned off.

  That is, in the case of the present embodiment (in the case of “lighting time: light extinguishing time = 1: N”), the light extinguishing time limit value (limit value determined in step S3305 in FIG. 81A = T8) is turned on. Time × N.

  FIG. 83 (d) is another example of a timing chart in the case where the driving data is turned on during the power LED turn-off period (lighting restricted).

  Data A for driving the power LED is data that is turned on (ON, H) at timing g, and is turned off (OFF, L) at timing h, and data B for driving the power LED is turned on at timing i. (ON, H) and data that is turned off (OFF, L) at timing k.

  The lighting time T1 from the timing g to the timing h and the lighting time T5 from the timing i to the timing k are times that do not exceed the maximum lighting time of the data for driving the power LED. In this example, after the light is first turned on at the timing g, the light LED can be turned on again even if it is turned off once at the time h in a period not exceeding the maximum lighting time T3 of the power LED.

  In the case of the present embodiment (when blinking may be repeated until the maximum lighting time), the limit value of the extinguishing time (the limiting value determined in step S3305 in FIG. Is the maximum extinction time.

  That is, the power LED is turned off based on the data A from the timing h to the timing j after the time T1 has elapsed from the start of lighting at the timing g. Then, at the timing i in the maximum lighting time T3, the light is turned on again based on the data B. Since the maximum lighting time T3 ends at the timing H, the power LED is turned off. That is, the time T6 ′ from the timing i to the timing h is turned on, and the time T7 ′ from the timing j to the timing k is turned off.

  FIG. 84E is an example of a timing chart in the case where the data for driving the power LED is blinking data whose lighting time and lighting time are 1: N (for example, N = 2).

  The data for driving the power LED is, for example, blinking data that repeatedly turns on for 1 second and turns off for 2 seconds. In other words, it is turned on (ON, H) at timing l, turned off (OFF, L) at timing m, turned on (ON, H) at timing n, turned off (OFF, L) at timing o, and turned on at timing p ( ON, H), extinguishing (OFF, L) at timing q, lighting (ON, H) at timing r, and extinguishing (OFF, L) at timing s. In this example, after the lighting is finished, lighting is limited for a predetermined period corresponding to the lighting time (for example, an integral multiple of the lighting time (for example, three times)).

  Each of the times T9 from the timing l to the timing m, from the timing n to the timing o, and from the timing p to the timing q is a time that does not exceed the maximum lighting time of the data for driving the power LED. In this case, the power LED is turned off after the time T9 has elapsed from the start of lighting at timing l, and lighting is restricted from timing m to timing o. This lighting restriction period T11 is, for example, three times as long as T9. And even if it is the data which starts the next lighting from the timing n during the lighting limitation time T11, lighting is limited during the time until the timing o when the lighting limitation period T11 ends. Then, the lighting can be started again from the timing o after the lighting limit time T11 ends, and the lighting is performed from the timing p to the timing q. Then, the lighting is turned off after the lighting time T9 has elapsed, and the lighting restriction period T11 is from the timing q to the timing s. And even if it is the data which starts the next lighting from the timing r during the lighting limitation time T11, lighting is limited during the time until the timing s when the lighting limitation period T11 ends. And it becomes possible to light again from the timing s after the lighting limit time T11 ends.

  In this example, even if lighting data is newly set during the lighting limit time, it is not lit until the lighting limit time ends. Since the timer for the driving data itself is counted as it is even during the lighting limit time, it continues (flashes) after the lighting limit time ends. Note that when driving data is set during the lighting limit time, even if there is a period during which lighting is possible, the data may not be output. Alternatively, the timer for driving data may be counted after the lighting limit time is over.

  (F) in the figure is a modification of FIG. (E), and the period that does not exceed the maximum lighting time T3 of the power LED even after the lighting time T9 of the blinking data is a case where the light LED is turned off once. It is an example of a timing chart when lighting is possible again.

  The blinking data is the same as in FIG. In this case, the power LED is turned off after the time T9 has elapsed from the start of lighting at timing l, and is turned off T10 from timing m to timing o. Then, the lighting is started again from the timing n, and is turned off at the timing o when the time T9 has elapsed. From timing o to timing p, the lighting time is T10, lighting is started again from timing p, and the lighting is turned off at timing q after the time T9 has elapsed. In this example, the period from the timing l to the timing α is the maximum lighting time T3, and during this period, even if it is turned off once, it can be turned on again. In this example, the time T11 from the timing q to the timing α is a turn-off time based on the driving data, and after the timing α is a lighting restriction period after the maximum lighting time T3 has elapsed.

  FIG. 85 (g) is an example of a timing chart in the case where extinguishing data (for example, lamp data for error notification (system data)) is interrupted while the power LED is on.

  Here, data C is data for driving the power LED, and is data that is turned on at timing t and turned off at timing w. On the other hand, data D is lamp data of a layer that is executed with priority over the power LED in order to notify an error, and is data that turns off the power LED from timing u to timing v.

  In this case, the power LED starts lighting at the timing t based on the data C, and lights up until the timing u at which the power LED is extinguished by the data D (lighting time T13). Then, the light is turned off based on the data D from the timing u to the timing v (light-off time T14), and is turned on again based on the data C from the timing v to the timing w (lighting time T15). In this example, the timing from the timing u to the timing v is the extinguishing time, but the power LED lighting time timer continues counting. Then, after the timing w when the maximum lighting time T12 (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, the lighting limit time is reached.

  In this way, even during the extinguishing time (T14), the timer for the time during which the data C is output (lighting time) continues to count. Then, after the output of the extinguishing data based on the data D is completed (after timing v), if the driving data based on the data C is output, the lighting data is output continuously (timing v to w).

  FIG. 85 (h) is another example of a timing chart in the case where extinction data (for example, error notification lamp data (system data)) is interrupted while the power LED is on.

  Here, data C is data for driving the power LED, and is data that is turned on at timing x and turned off at timing z. On the other hand, data D is lamp data of a layer that is executed with priority over the power LED in order to notify an error, and is data that turns off the power LED from timing y to timing B.

  In this case, the power LED starts to turn on from the timing x based on the data C, but is turned off based on the data D at the timing y, and is turned off until the timing B (T19). In this example, after the lighting time T16 based on the data C has elapsed, the lighting limit time starts from the timing z. The lighting limit time T17 is an integral multiple (for example, three times) of the lighting time, but this lighting limit time 17 is not an integer multiple of the actual lighting time T18, but an integer multiple of the lighting time T16 of the data C. Is done. That is, in this example, the actual lighting limit time T17 is longer than the lighting limit time based on the actual lighting time T18.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when an error command (for example, the error command shown in FIGS. 71 to 73) is received from the main control unit, the power LED is turned off at least. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, a glass frame open error, a payout excess error, an illegal payout error, a payout number switch error, a main control communication error, a CR unit non-installed zuke error, a timing (magnet) detection error, an external clock error In the present embodiment, the game board lamp 532 is turned off in the case of an error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch level error error, a door open error, a switch disconnection error, an impact error error, or a winning rate error error, and the game table The frame lamp 542 is turned on.

  In all the above embodiments, when the fourth symbol is configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the display position of the fourth symbol may move during the symbol variation. . For example, when the state of the effect movable body 224 changes (moves, deforms, etc.) and overlaps with the display position of the fourth symbol, the display position of the fourth symbol does not overlap with the effect movable body 224. You may comprise so that it may move to. Note that the display position of the fourth symbol may not be moved while the symbol is stopped.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a display unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and the display unit includes a plurality of display units. It is a means capable of displaying a type of display, and one type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first type of round display (for example, round display of 16R jackpot effect of special figure 2), In the first jackpot of the Nth time (for example, the 16R jackpot of the first special figure 2 during the probability change (substantial hit of the 16R probability change), the first effect display (for example, FIG. 12 (l) to character display effect display shown in FIG. 13 (s) may be displayed, and the (N + 1) th first big hit (for example, 16R in the second special chart 2 during the probability change). Jackpot) The second effect display (for example, the character introduction effect display shown in FIG. 13 (v) to FIG. 13 (w)) in the first type of round display may be displayed. The N + 1th first jackpot is a jackpot that may be performed after the Nth first jackpot, and the second effect display is an effect display different from the first effect display. It is a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a display characteristic.

  That is, the first type of round display during the jackpot round is performed differently depending on the number of jackpots (number of consecutive villas) of the first jackpot, so the player sees by the number of jackpots (number of pools) There is a case where the effect display that can be made can be different. Thereby, there are cases where the player can be entertained with the effect display even if the consecutive resort is continued.

  Also, when the first type of round display effect is a character introduction effect, for example, the character introduction effect during the first big hit round during probability change can be configured to always start from the hero, There are cases where the interest of an unknown player can be enhanced.

  N is a natural number. In addition to a big hit (first big hit) for performing the first type of round display, there may be a big hit (third big hit) for which no round display is performed. In addition, there may be a case where the first type of round display is performed with all the jackpots (when all jackpots correspond to the first jackpot). N may be the number of consecutive resorts.

  Further, the first effect display is configured to be displayed at the first big hit of the Nth time, and the first effect display is not displayed at the first big hit of the (N + 1) th time. It may be configured as described above.

  According to such a configuration, the first effect display is displayed at the first jackpot for the Nth time, and the first effect display is not displayed at the next jackpot, so the first jackpot has been performed N times. Can be easily noticed by the player. Further, in the (N + 1) th big hit, since the first effect display displayed in the Nth first big hit is not displayed, the tiredness caused by continuing the same effect display is prevented, and the first There may be a case where a player can be given a sense of superiority by increasing the number of jackpots.

  Moreover, a control means (for example, the 1st sub control part 400) is provided, and the said control means is a means which can perform control (for example, effect control process of step S309 of FIG. 9) regarding multiple types of effect lotteries, One type of lottery effect lottery is a lottery concerning the first type of round display (hereinafter referred to as “character in the character introduction setting process of FIG. 31 (a)”. Introductory lottery process (lottery in step S1411) ”), and the control means is means for selecting the first effect display when the first big hit is the Nth time, The control means may be a means for executing the first effect lottery when the N + 1th first big hit.

  According to such a configuration, the round display that can be seen in the first jackpot of the (N + 1) th rotation is shown while the first jackpot is displayed in the first jackpot for the Nth time by performing the lottery of the round display. In some cases, the performance can be random and entertained by the player.

  The effect display selected once by lottery may not be selected at the next lottery opportunity, but the effect display selected once by lottery can be selected by the next lottery. May be.

  In addition, the number of times of the first jackpot is the number of times that the game state is counted in the period of the electric support state (short state of special figure low accuracy normal figure high accuracy, special figure high accuracy normal figure high accuracy probability change state). Yes, the number of first big hits may be the number of times that is cleared when the power support state (the special figure low accuracy normal figure high accuracy time short state) ends.

  That is, the number of times of the first jackpot may be counted during the retreat, and the count may be cleared when the retreat is completed.

  In addition, it may be configured to continue being counted even after the retreat is completed, and may be cleared by clearing RAM. Further, it may be configured to be able to determine whether the count is continued by the operation by the player or cleared even after the retreat is finished.

  In addition, in the game stand (ST machine) that is configured to limit the number of times that the accuracy variation state of the special figure high accuracy and high accuracy continues, the electric support state (the special variation state of the special illustration high accuracy and high accuracy) There may be a transition from a special figure high-precision normal figure high-accuracy probability change state to a special figure high-precision normal figure low-accuracy latent probability change state, provided that the number of special game fluctuation games has reached the specified number. However, it may be configured to continue counting the number of first big hits when transitioning from a special figure, high accuracy, and high accuracy to a special figure, high accuracy, and low latency Further, when the probability variation state shifts to the latent probability variation state, the first jackpot count may be cleared.

  Further, the first effect display may be displayed in the first M jackpot, and the second effect display is displayed in the M + 1 first jackpot. The Mth time may be larger than the N + 1th time.

  According to such a configuration, when a plurality of effect displays (first effect display, second effect display,...) Are executed in a series (when one round is taken), the first effect display is again performed. May be selected.

  Further, in the first round of the first jackpot of the Nth time (for example, the sixth round of 16R jackpot of the Nth special figure 2), the first effect display may be started. The second effect display may be started in the first round of the first jackpot of the (N + 1) th time (for example, the sixth round of 16R jackpot of the (R + 1) special figure 2). It may be configured as described above.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to start the first effect display from the first round.

  Further, one type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second type of round display (for example, round display of 12R jackpot effect in FIG. 1, round display without executing character introduction effect display). The second type of round display (for example, the 12R big hit in Fig. 1 (substantial 8R probability variation big hit)) is configured such that the second type of round display may be displayed. The round display may be a display different from the first type round display.

  The second type of round display may be displayed from the first round.

  The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In addition, a gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to an embodiment of the present invention is a gaming table provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the display means displays a plurality of types of displays. It is a displayable means, and one type of display among the plurality of types of display is a display relating to the launch position (hereinafter referred to as “launch position display (for example, hitting suggestion display)”). In the gaming state (for example, electric support state), the display means may display the launch position display, and in the first gaming state, the number of holdings is more than the first number (for example, 1). In the case of a small size, the display means displays the firing position display. In this case, the first number is a natural number (including 0).

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a display characteristic.

  In other words, there may be a case where a plurality of symbol variations are performed during one performance. In such a case, when the number of holdings is smaller than the first number in the first gaming state, the firing position is displayed (hit suggestion display). Is displayed, the player can be made to confirm the launch position and can be alerted to the launch position in some cases. Further, it may be possible to notify the player that the hold is 0 and to prompt the launch.

  The firing position display is not limited to the right-handed suggestion display, but may be a left-handed suggestion display.

  In addition, the first gaming state is an electric support state, the launch position display is a right-handed suggestion display, and the symbol change of the first rotation after the electric support state is started. The right-hand suggestion display may be displayed on the display means.

  In addition, the right-handed suggestion display may be displayed on the display means without fail in the first rotation of the symbol change after the start of the power support state (always after the first big hit).

  According to such a configuration, since there are a plurality of timings at which the right-handed suggestion display during the electric support is displayed, it is possible to increase the timing at which the player confirms the launch position and to prompt the alert to the launch position. There is a case.

  In the above embodiment, the right-handed suggestion display is displayed only after the big hit (first big hit) in the normal state (the special figure low-precision normal figure low-precision) is completed, and the electric support state (the special figure high-precision common figure is displayed). It is configured not to display the right-handed hint display after the big hit in the high accuracy or special figure low-precision normal figure high-precision), but right-handed hint display is displayed after the completion in all big hits. You may be comprised so that.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the timing for displaying the right-handed hint display is after receiving the variation start command after the big hit end, but may be after receiving the big hit end command.

  Further, not only the symbol variation at the first rotation, but also symbol variation (N is a natural number) at the Nth rotation after the electric support is started. For example, the change that the change pattern lottery table has changed (for example, the change start of the 85th rotation of the probability change table scenario (the “Echigoya tracking” mode start) shown in the special figure change pattern lottery table determination table shown in FIG. 24C) Time or change before the change pattern lottery table changes (the final change in the “Echigoya search” mode at the 84th rotation of the probability change table scenario shown in the special figure change pattern lottery table determination table shown in FIG. 24C) The right-hand suggestion display may be displayed at the time of symbol stop in the “Echigoya Tracking” mode.

  In addition, after transitioning from the electric support state (hereinafter referred to as “first electric support state”) to a non-electric support state (for example, big hit gaming state), the electric support state (hereinafter referred to as “second electric support state”). State ") may be started, and the right-handed suggestion display may be displayed on the display means in the first fluctuation of the symbol after the second power support state is started. It may be configured.

  For example, when the detection means detects a left-handed strike (when it is detected that a game ball has passed through the gate on the left side of the game area), in the symbol variation of the first rotation after the second electric support state is started The right-handed suggestion display may be displayed on the display means.

  Further, in the symbol fluctuation after the second rotation after the first electric support state is started, the right-hand suggestion display is not displayed on the display means, and the second electric support state is started. It may be configured such that the right-handed suggestion display may be displayed on the display means in the first rotation symbol variation.

  In addition, in the symbol fluctuation after the second rotation after the first electric support state is started, when the detection means detects left-handed (detects that the game ball has passed to the gate on the left side of the game area) The right-handed suggestion display may be displayed on the display means.

  Further, even if the detection means detects a left-handed strike in the first rotation of the symbol variation after the start of the first power support state, the right-handed suggestion display may not be displayed again. Good (for example, when a right-hand suggestion display is displayed for 5 seconds, if 3 seconds have already passed when left-handed detection is detected, a right-hand suggestion display is displayed for the remaining 2 seconds. If the display is displayed for 5 seconds and is not displayed, the right-handed suggestion display is not displayed again. However, when left-handed is detected, the right-handed suggestion display is displayed again. Or the display time of the right-hand suggestion display may be extended (for example, when the right-hand suggestion display is displayed for 5 seconds, when 3 seconds have already passed when the left-hand hit detection is detected, Count to 5 seconds Set to display the right-handed suggestion display, or reset the count for 5 seconds after 2 seconds.If the right-handed suggestion display is already displayed for 5 seconds and is not displayed, right-handed again For example, a suggestion display is displayed for 5 seconds).

  Further, a right-handed suggestion display is performed in the symbol fluctuation after the second rotation after the first electric support state is started and / or the symbol fluctuation in the first rotation after the second electric support state is started. If left-handed detection is detected again during display, the right-handed suggestion display may be displayed again (deleted once and displayed again), or the display time of the right-handed suggestion display may be extended. When the display time of the right-hand suggestion display that has already been displayed ends, it may be deleted. The same applies to the left-handed suggestion display.

  In addition, when left strike is detected in the non-electric support state (when it is detected that a game ball has passed through the gate on the left side of the game area), the right strike suggestion display may not be displayed. Good.

  Further, when a right strike is detected in the electric support state (when it is detected that a game ball has passed through the gate on the right side of the game area), the left strike suggestion display may not be displayed. .

  The firing position display is a first right-hand suggestion display (for example, a right-hand suggestion display displayed in the first striking suggestion display area 710). One type of display is a second right-hand suggestion display (for example, a right-hand suggestion display displayed in the second striking suggestion display area 720), and the second right-hand suggestion display is the second right-hand suggestion display. It is a display in a display mode different from the one right-hand suggestion display, and is configured to display the second right-hand suggestion display in the electric support state, and has shifted from the electric support state to the non-electric support state. It may be configured such that the second right-hand suggestion display is erased in the subsequent first-cycle symbol variation.

  According to such a configuration, the second right-handed suggestion display is erased when transitioning from the electric support state to the non-electric support state, so the player confirms that the launch position in the electric support is right-handed. May be easier to do.

  The first right-hand suggestion display may be larger than the second right-hand suggestion display. The first right-handed suggestion display may be configured to be displayed even during a big hit.

  In addition, the first right-handed suggestion display receives a winning-port winning command (subcommand) including information indicating that the main control has entered a specific winning-port (such as a gate or electric Chu) in the right-handed gaming state. Then, the display may be displayed. The left-handed suggestion display is different from the right-handed suggested display displayed in the right-handed gaming state in that the left-handed suggested display is different from the right-handed suggested display displayed in the right-handed gaming state. It may be displayed similarly. It should be noted that even when a winning mouth winning command including information indicating that the player has entered a specific winning mouth is received, a period during which the hitting suggestion display (right handed / left handed) is prohibited from being displayed (for example, , A period in which the right-handed suggestion display is displayed in the first rotation after the first big hit, and a period in which the right-handed hint display is displayed in the first-time symbol variation display after the end of the electric support (for example, a right-handed suggestion display) 6 seconds from the start of the right-handed suggestion display during the “Echigoya pursuit” in this embodiment (for example, 6 seconds after the right-handed suggestion display is started) When it is a period in which the characters “right-handed!” Shown in FIG. 19 (2) of this embodiment at the time of starting the big hit according to FIG. 1 are displayed (for example, 20 seconds after the big hit start display is displayed) , Do not display It may be configured to.

  The second right-hand suggestion display may be a display displayed when a firing position command (subcommand) is received from the main control in the right-handed gaming state.

  Further, the firing position display may be deleted after a first time (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed since the launch position display is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where troublesomeness due to the firing position display (right-hand suggestion display) being displayed forever can be prevented.

  Note that the configuration in which the right-handed suggestion display is deleted is not limited to the above, and may be deleted when entry to the right sensor (for example, a gate or an electric chew) is detected.

  In addition, a sound output means (for example, a speaker 120) is provided, the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a plurality of types of notification sounds, and one type of the notification sound among the plurality of types of notification sounds is: It is a right-handed notification sound (for example, a sound “right-handed!” Output from the speaker 120), and in the first fluctuation of the symbol after the first gaming state is started, the sound output means It is configured to output a right-handed notification sound, and in the first gaming state, when the number of holdings is smaller than the first number, the sound output means outputs the right-handed notification sound. It may be configured not to output.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by outputting a right-handed notification sound when the player intentionally stops firing (because of leaving the game table, etc.). May be possible.

  In addition, there is a case where the player can be alerted by outputting a right-handed notification sound in the first rotation of the symbol change when the electric support state is started.

  In addition, there is a detecting means (for example, special figure 1 starting port 230 (or a general figure starting port 228 in the game area on the left side), and a game ball has entered the detecting means during the first gaming state. In some cases, the firing position display may be displayed.

  According to such a configuration, the player may be able to easily notice that the game ball is being fired in a direction not intended by the player.

  Note that the detection means may be in a position where entry is impossible when the player makes a right turn on the game board. Moreover, the detection means in the area | region on the left side of a game board may be sufficient.

  The hold may be configured to store up to a second number (eg, 4).

  Further, in the first mode in the first gaming state (for example, Echigoya search mode), the launch position display is not displayed even when the hold is smaller than the first number. In the second mode in the first gaming state (for example, Echigoya tracking mode), the firing position display is displayed when the hold is smaller than the first number, The first mode may be a mode different from the second mode.

  Further, the firing position display may be displayed only in the second mode, and the firing position display may not be displayed in the first mode.

  A specific mode (for example, Echigoya tracking mode) may be configured from a plurality of variation pattern lottery tables.

  Also, in the first gaming state, when the hold is smaller than the first number, the firing position display is displayed when a second time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the symbol stop. It may be. The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In addition, a gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to an embodiment of the present invention is a gaming table provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the display means displays a plurality of types of displays. Display means, wherein one type of display of the plurality of types of display is a decorative design, and one type of display of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, hold The display means is a means capable of displaying a first type of decorative design (for example, a pseudo-continuous decorative design) as the decorative design, and during the display of the first display The first type of decorative design is configured to be displayed at the first display position. While the first display is not displayed, the first type of decorative design is at the second display position. The second table configured to be displayed Position may be a different display position and the first display position.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a display characteristic.

  In other words, since the display position of the first type of decorative design differs between when the first display is displayed and when it is not displayed, it is easy to notice that the first display has been hidden. May be possible. Moreover, it may be easy to see both the first display and the first type of decorative design.

  Further, the first display is a display including at least a hold icon, and the first display is configured to overlap a part of the first-type decorative design at the first display position. It may be a thing.

  According to such a configuration, there may be a case where the presentation effect can be enhanced by displaying the first type of decorative design without being held by the display position of the display including the hold icon. Moreover, there are cases where attention can be paid to both the display including the hold icon and the first type of decorative design.

  The first display may be a display including a change icon, and the first display may be a display including an area for displaying the change notice.

  The first display position is a position at which a part of the first type of decorative design is not displayed, and the second display position is all of the first type of decorative design. May be the position where is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, when the first display is hidden and the player can see all of the first type of decorative symbols, the first type of decorative symbols can be noticed. There is.

  The first type of decorative symbol is a decorative symbol indicating that there is a possibility that one effect (for example, a super reach effect, a pseudo-ream effect, a pre-reading notice effect of a change in hold, a mode transition, etc.) may be performed. There may be.

  Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a second type of decorative design as the decorative design, the second type of decorative design is a decorative design including numbers, and the second type of decorative design The decorative design may be a decorative design that may suggest the type of jackpot by the combination of the second type of decorative design.

  In addition, one type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, an error display, a launch position display, a display before starting the island simultaneous production, etc.), and the first display position The displayed decorative pattern of the first type is configured to be displayed at the first display position even when the second display is displayed, and is displayed at the second display position. The decorative pattern of the first type may be configured to be displayed at the second display position even when the second display is displayed.

  Note that the display position of the combination of mini decoration symbols (decorative display of the decoration symbol) may be configured so as not to change, but the display position of the combination of mini decoration symbols may also be configured to change.

  The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In addition, a game machine (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to an embodiment of the present invention is a game machine provided with effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), and the effect control means has a plurality of types. The effect lottery (for example, the lottery process in the effect control process shown in step S309 in FIG. 9) can be executed, and one of the plurality of types of effect lotteries is a pre-reading effect lottery (for example, special lottery FIG. 2 is a pre-read lottery, and the production control means performs information on the first pre-read production (hereinafter referred to as “first pre-read production information (for example, a chance eye notice production) by the pre-production production lottery concerning the first hold”. The lottery information to be executed and the conditionally overwritable correction information (correction information “2”)) ”) may be selected. Is pre-reading target (the pre-read lottery has been won), information that can be overwritten with conditions (correction information = “2”) is set in the correction information of the pre-read lottery information table, And the first prefetch effect information corresponding to the first hold information (hereinafter referred to as the second prefetch effect information) when the hold is further increased within the same fluctuation in which the hold has increased. , Means for executing control to change to “second pre-reading effect information (for example, lottery information for executing ripple notice effect and correction information that cannot be overwritten (correction information“ 0 ”)”). It is a characteristic game stand.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by control by the effect control means.

  That is, the pachinko machine 100 includes pre-reading effect information (pre-reading effect correction information) that can be overwritten under certain conditions, and is executed because the pre-reading effect information may be overwritten when a change condition is satisfied. There are cases where variations can be added to the pre-reading notice. In some cases, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the look-ahead notice toward the big hit.

  Further, the production control means may select the second prefetch production information by the prefetch production lottery related to a hold different from the first hold (hereinafter referred to as “second hold”). And the second hold is a hold increased after the first hold,

  The requirement that the change condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes the increase of the second hold in the symbol variation in which the first hold is increased, and the requirement that the change condition is satisfied is the second requirement The requirement may include that the second prefetch effect information corresponding to the hold is set.

  According to such a configuration, in order to change the prefetch information when the second hold to be prefetched increases during the fluctuation in which the first hold increases, the prefetch information related to the first hold is changed to the first hold. It can be determined not to be confirmed by the symbol variation with the increase in the hold, and a series of effects can be performed based on the pre-read effect information about the hold that has entered later, and the effect can be enhanced. Thereby, it may be possible to prevent the prefetch effect from being interrupted.

  Further, the effect control means is a means for executing control for determining the prefetch effect information corresponding to the first hold as the first prefetch effect information when the change condition is not established. It may be a thing.

  According to such a configuration, when the change condition is not satisfied, the pre-reading effect information (correction information) cannot be overwritten, and the pre-reading notice can be overwritten and sometimes cannot be overwritten. There are cases where variations can be increased.

  For example, when limited to symbol variation, if a hold is entered within the same variation, the prefetch notice is overwritten, and if a hold is entered after the next change, the prefetch notice is not overwritten. In some cases, “pre-reading production with a sense of unity” is executed, and there is a case where expectation can be given to the pre-reading production rather than the case where the hold increases only slightly due to a change.

  In addition, the effect control means, according to the result of the prefetch effect lottery regarding the first hold, information indicating that the prefetch effect is not executed (hereinafter referred to as “fourth prefetch effect information (for example, execute prefetch notice) Lottery information and correction information that can be overwritten (correction information “1”)) ”) may be selected. , "The third hold"), the information relating to the third prefetch effect (hereinafter referred to as "the third prefetch effect information (for example, the lottery information for executing the prefetch notice effect A) and the overwriting cannot be overwritten"). Correction information (correction information “0”)) ”) may be selected, and the effect control means is set with the third pre-read effect information corresponding to the third hold. In case, The serial the fourth prefetch effect information corresponding to the first hold may be a means for changing said third look-ahead effect information.

  The first look-ahead effect information is information including first correction information (for example, correction information “2”) as correction information, and the first correction information is the change. It may be information that permits the change to the second prefetch effect information when the condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the first hold may be a hold that is scheduled to change in the first change time. In addition, the first hold may be a hold selected on the basis of a loss. The first hold may be a hold selected for a big hit or a small hit.

  The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In addition, a game table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to an embodiment of the present invention is a game table including production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) and a plurality of types of light emission means. One of the plurality of light emitting means is a first light emitting means (for example, a game board lamp 532), and the effect control means controls the first light emitting means to turn on. The first light emitting means is a means configured to be lit when the first lighting period (for example, the period T1 in FIG. 82A) starts, The first light emitting means is a means configured to be turned off when the first lighting period ends, and the effect control means, when the first lighting period ends, Means for setting an extinguishing period according to the first lighting period; Serial-off period, the a first lighting period different lengths period, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the production control means.

  In other words, the power LED lighting period is set in accordance with the lighting period of the power LED (for example, when the power LED is turned on for 1 second, it is controlled to be turned off for 3 seconds without fail). In some cases, the emission control can be performed.

  The lighting period and the extinguishing period may be the same period (time).

  The light emitting means may be a power LED, a high-intensity LED, a high power LED, or the like, or a standard LED.

  The first lighting period is a period that ends when a first lighting time (for example, a lighting time of lighting data or a maximum lighting time) elapses after the first light emitting unit is turned on. The turn-off period is a period that ends when the turn-off time elapses after the first turn-on period ends, and the turn-off time is N times (for example, three times) the first turn-on time. ). Note that N in this case is a real number (natural number, decimal number).

  According to such a configuration, the turn-off time is set to N times the first turn-on time, so there is no need to have data about the turn-off time, and data can be reduced in some cases.

  Further, the effect control means executes control to turn off the first light emitting means when a maximum lighting time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the first light emitting means is turned on. The effect control means is a means for executing control to turn off the first light emitting means even during the first lighting period when the maximum lighting time has elapsed. It may be.

  Note that the maximum lighting time is a time period during which the first light emitting unit can be continuously lit (controllably). The maximum lighting time is a time that is started after the first light emitting means is first turned on, and when it is blinking, it is a time obtained by adding a lighting period.

  Moreover, the main control means (for example, main control part 300, payout control part 600) is provided, and the effect control means receives an error command (for example, the error command shown in FIGS. 71 to 73) from the main control means. In this case, the first light emitting unit may be at least a light-off state.

  According to such a configuration, when an error occurs, it may be forcibly turned off even during the lighting period.

  Further, the first light emitting means is configured to be lit according to one lighting data among the plurality of lighting data, and one lighting data among the plurality of lighting data is The first lighting data may be data including lighting of the first light emitting means in the first lighting period.

  In other words, the first lighting data may be blinking data that repeatedly turns on and off during the first lighting period, or may be data only of lighting (lighting data).

  Further, one lighting data among the plurality of lighting data is second lighting data, and the second lighting data includes lighting of the first light emitting unit in a second lighting period. It may be data.

  Further, the first light emitting means may be one in which the light-off state is maintained even when the second light-on period starts during the light-off period.

  One of the plurality of types of light emitting means is a second light emitting means (for example, a standard LED, various lamps 418), and the second light emitting means has the second lighting period. The second light emitting means is a means configured to be turned off when the second lighting period ends, and the effect The control unit may be a unit that does not set the extinguishing period corresponding to the second lighting period when the second lighting period ends.

  In addition, it is possible to provide an effect means (for example, the center accessory unit 900), and the first light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means 716a) may be a means provided in the effect means. The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  The first light emitting means may be provided on a door body (for example, the front frame door 106), and the first light emitting means includes a frame (for example, a game frame, a main body (inner frame) 104, an outer frame, and the like. 102). Further, the first light emitting means may be provided inside the housing.

  Further, when there are a plurality of light emitting means that are the same as the first light emitting means, they may be provided on the game board 200 and the game frame, respectively (may be provided as a game board lamp 532 and a game table frame lamp 542). Further, when there are a plurality of light emitting means that are the same as the first light emitting means, the light emitting means may be provided respectively in the effect means A, the effect means B (different parts).

  Further, the first light emitting means may be composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the first light emitting means may be composed of one (single) LED.

  Further, both the gaming board lamp 532 and the gaming platform frame lamp 542 may be turned off, or the gaming board lamp 532 may be turned on when the gaming platform frame lamp 542 is turned off.

  When the first light emitting unit is a high luminance light emitting unit, useless power consumption may be suppressed by turning off the high luminance LED during an error. In some cases, power consumption can be suppressed by limiting the lighting time of high-brightness LEDs. Moreover, it may be possible to prevent exceeding the maximum power consumption due to overlapping with the operation period of other devices (such as a solenoid controlled by the main control unit 300 such as a production means or an attacker).

  Further, the gaming table may be a slot machine.

  In addition, when a power LED and a high-brightness LED that emits light with a higher luminance (capable of flowing a large current) are provided, the high-brightness LED is configured to have a longer maximum lighting time than the power LED. However, it may be the same or vice versa.

  In addition, when a power LED and a high power LED that can flow a larger current (can emit light with higher luminance) are provided, the power LED is configured to have a longer maximum lighting time than the high power LED. However, it may be the same or vice versa.

  Further, when a plurality of types of light emitting means capable of emitting light with high luminance are provided, a light emitting means (for example, a high power LED) that supplies larger power (can emit light with higher luminance) is the other light emitting means ( For example, the maximum lighting time may be shorter than the power LED), but may be the same or vice versa.

  Further, when a plurality of light emitting means (for example, power LEDs) capable of emitting light with high luminance are provided, the other light emitting means may be configured to be turned off when one of the light emitting means is turned on. However, the lighting periods of both light emitting means may be configured to overlap. Further, in the case where a light emitting means capable of emitting light with a high luminance of 3 or more is provided, the two light emitting means may be configured to be turned off when one light emitting means is turned on. When the light emitting unit is turned on, one light emitting unit may be configured to be turned off. The same applies to the case where a light emitting means capable of emitting light with high luminance of 4 or more is provided.

  In addition, when a light emitting means (for example, a power LED) capable of emitting light with high luminance and one or a plurality of light emitting means (for example, standard LED) capable of emitting light with standard luminance are provided, light emission capable of emitting light with high luminance is provided. Even when the means is lit, one or more light emitting means capable of emitting light with a standard luminance may be configured to be lit. It may be configured such that one or a plurality of light emitting means capable of emitting light with a brightness of 5 are turned off.

  Note that the special figure state update process and the special figure-related lottery process described above may be independently performed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and the lottery results may be displayed separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special drawings may be displayed in one area. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  Further, depending on the state of one special figure, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure may not be performed.

  Note that the embodiments and various examples (modifications) described so far can be implemented by combining or replacing all or a part of each configuration.

  Further, the game stand according to the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel , A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is won by lottery, and reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control related to the stop of the reel and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the winning combination internally A determination means for determining whether or not the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, and a payout control unit that performs a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode; It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. That is, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball The ball payout may be executed by credit.

  In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, in some cases, the content described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in the embodiments may be applied to other configurations to further widen the game.

  The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to game machines represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball game machine (pachinko machine).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Inner frame 120 Speaker 156 Main control board 160 1st sub control board 170 Discharge control board 182 Power supply board 208 Decorative design display device 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 230 1st Special drawing start port 232 Second special drawing start port 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
600 payout controller 708 RAM

Claims (7)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a decorative design,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first type of decorative design as the decorative design,
During the display of the first display, the first type of decorative design is configured to be displayed at a first display position,
During the non-display of the first display, the first type of decorative design is configured to be displayed at a second display position,
The second display position is a display position different from the first display position.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The first display is a display including at least a hold icon;
The first display is configured to overlap a part of the first type of decorative design at the first display position.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The first display position is a position at which a part of the decorative pattern of the first type is hidden.
The second display position is a position where all of the first type of decorative symbols are displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
The first type of decorative design is a decorative design indicating that there is a possibility that one effect is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second type of decorative design as the decorative design,
The second type of decorative design is a decorative design including numbers,
The second type of decorative design is a decorative design that may suggest a jackpot type by a combination of the second type of decorative design.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first type of decorative design displayed at the first display position is configured to be displayed at the first display position even when the second display is displayed,
The first type of decorative symbol displayed at the second display position is configured to be displayed at the second display position even when the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.